Canon 700D + 18-55STM User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for 700D + 18-55STM by Canon which is a product in the Digital Cameras category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
E
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
The “Quick Reference Guide” is included at the end of this manual.
E
E
COPY
2
The EOS REBEL T5i/EOS 700D is a high-performance, digital single-
lens reflex camera featuring a fine-detail CMOS sensor with approx.
18.00 effective megapixels, DIGIC 5, high-precision and high-speed
9-point AF, approx. 5 fps continuous shooting, Live View shooting, and
Full High-Definition (Full HD) movie shooting.
The camera is highly responsive to any shooting situation, and provides
many features for demanding shots.
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
With a digital camera, you can immediately view the image you have
captured. While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how
they come out. You can then better understand the camera.
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety
Warnings” (p.349, 350) and “Handling Precautions” (p.16, 17).
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory
card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware that
certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.
Introduction
This camera is compatible with SD memory cards, SDHC memory
cards, and SDXC memory cards. In this manual, “card” refers to all
these cards.
*The camera does not come with a card for recording images/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
Cards that can record movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card rated SD Speed Class 6
“ ” or higher (p.173).
COPY
3
Before starting, check that all the following items have been included
with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
* Battery Charger LC-E8 or LC-E8E is provided. (The LC-E8E comes with a
power cord.)
If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lens is included.
Depending on the Lens Kit type, a lens instruction manual may also be
included.
Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
Item Check List
Battery Pack
LP-E8
(with protective cover)
Battery Charger
LC-E8/LC-E8E*
Interface Cable
Wide Strap
EW-100DB IV
Camera
(with eyecup and body cap)
EOS DIGITAL
Solution Disk
(Software)
Software Instruction
Manual
Camera
Instruction Manual
(this booklet)
Software Instruction Manuals
The Software Instruction Manuals are included on the CD-ROM as
PDF files. See page 367 for instructions to look up information in the
Software Instruction Manuals.
COPY
4
Icons in this Manual
<6> : Indicates the Main Dial.
<V> <U> : Indicates the <S> Cross keys.
<0> : Indicates the Setting button.
0, 9, 7, 8: Indicates that the corresponding function
remains active for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or 16
sec. respectively after you let go of the button.
* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials,
and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the
LCD monitor.
3: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the
<M> button and changing the setting.
M: When shown on the upper right of a page, it indicates that the
function is available only in the Creative Zone modes (p.24).
(p.**) : Reference page number for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Problem-solving advice.
Basic Assumptions
All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch
is already set to <1> (p.34).
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are
set to their defaults.
The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.
Conventions Used in this Manual
COPY
5
For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s
basic operations and shooting procedures.
Chapters
Introduction 2
Getting Started 27
Basic Shooting and Image Playback 57
Creative Shooting 85
Advanced Shooting 109
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
145
Shooting Movies 173
Handy Features 203
Wireless Flash Photography 229
Image Playback 241
Post-Processing Images 273
Printing Images 279
Customizing the Camera 295
Reference 305
Downloading Images to a Personal Computer 361
Quick Reference Guide and Index
369
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
11
1
2
1
3
14
1
5
COPY
6
Contents at a Glance
Shooting
Shoot automatically Î p.57 - 75 (Basic Zone modes)
Shoot continuously Î p.104 (i Continuous shooting)
Take a picture of yourself in a group
Î p.106 (j Self-timer)
Freeze the action Î p.110 (s Shutter-priority AE)
Blur the action
Blur the background Î p.64 (C Creative Auto)
Keep the background in sharp focus
Î p.112 (f Aperture-priority AE)
Adjust the image brightness (exposure)
Î p.119 (Exposure compensation)
Shoot in low light Î p.58, 107 (D Flash photography)
p.92 (ISO speed setting)
Shoot without flash Î p.63 (7 Flash Off)
p.76 (b Flash Off)
Photograph fireworks at night Î p.116 (Bulb exposure)
Shoot while viewing the LCD monitor
Î p.145 (A Live View shooting)
Using Creative Filters Î p.152 (Creative filters)
Shoot movies Î p.173 (k Movie shooting)
Image Quality
Shoot with image effects matching the subject
Î p.95 (Picture Style)
COPY
7
Make a large-size print of the picture
Î p.88 (73, 83, 1)
Take many pictures Î p.88 (7a, 8a, b, c)
Focusing
Change the point of focus Î p.100 (S AF point selection)
Shoot a moving subject Î p.70, 98 (AI Servo AF)
Playback
View the images on the camera
Î p.84 (x Playback)
Search for pictures quickly Î p.242 (H Index display)
p.243 (I Image browsing)
Rate images Î p.248 (Ratings)
Prevent important images Î p.266 (K Image protect)
from accidental deletion
Delete unnecessary images Î p.268 (L Delete)
Auto play images and movies Î p.258 (Slide show)
View the images or movies on a TV set
Î p.262 (Video OUT)
Adjust the LCD monitor brightness
Î p.205 (LCD monitor brightness)
Printing
Print pictures easily Î p.279 (Direct printing)
COPY
8
Power
Battery
• Charging Î p.28
• Installing/Removing Î p.30
• Battery check Î p.35
Power outlet Î p.306
Auto power off Î p.34
Card
Installing/Removing Î p.31
Format Î p.48
Release shutter without
card Î p.204
Lens
Attaching/Detaching Î p.39
Zoom Î p.40
Image Stabilizer Î p.41
Basic Settings
Dioptric adjustment Î p.42
Language Î p.38
Zone/Date/Time Î p.36
Beeper Î p.204
LCD Monitor
Using the LCD Monitor Î p.33
LCD auto off/on Î p.217
Brightness adjustment Î p.205
Touch screen Î p.53
Recording Images
Creating/Selecting a folder
Î p.206
File numbering Î p.208
Image Quality
Image-recording quality Î p.88
Picture Style Î p.95
White balance Î p.137
Color space Î p.141
Image enhancement features
• Auto Lighting Optimizer Î p.125
• Lens peripheral
illumination correction Î p.129
• Chromatic aberration
correction Î p.130
• Noise reduction for
long exposures Î p.127
• Noise reduction for
high ISO speeds Î p.126
• Highlight tone priority Î p.299
AF
AF operation Î p.97
AF point selection Î p.100
Manual focusing Î p.103
Drive
Drive mode Î p.22
Continuous shooting Î p.104
Self-timer Î p.106
Maximum burst Î p.90
Shooting
Shooting mode Î p.24
ISO speed Î p.92
Feature guide Î p.52
Bulb Î p.116
Mirror lockup Î p.142
Metering mode Î p.117
Remote control Î p.307
Quick Control Î p.44
Index to Features
COPY
9
Index to Features
Exposure Adjustment
Exposure compensation Î p.119
AEB Î p.121
AE lock Î p.123
Flash
Built-in flash Î p.107
• Flash exposure
compensation Î p.120
• FE lock Î p.124
External flash Î p.309
Flash control Î p.218
• Wireless flash Î p.229
Live View Shooting
Live View shooting Î p.145
Autofocusing (AF)
methods Î p.159
Continuous AF Î p.156
Touch Shutter Î p.168
Aspect ratio Î p.157
Grid display Î p.156
Quick Control Î p.151
Creative filters Î p.152
Movie Shooting
Movie shooting Î p.173
Movie Servo AF Î p.196
Sound recording Î p.198
Grid display Î p.198
Manual exposure Î p.177
Still photo shooting Î p.182
Quick Control Î p.184
Video snapshot Î p.187
Playback
Image review time Î p.204
Single-image display Î p.84
Shooting information
display Î p.270
Index display Î p.242
Image browsing
(Jump display) Î p.243
Magnified view Î p.244
Image rotate Î p.247
Rating Î p.248
Movie playback Î p.254
Editing out movie’s
first/last scene Î p.256
Slide show Î p.258
Viewing images on TV Î p.262
Protect Î p.266
Erase Î p.268
Quick Control Î p.250
Image Editing
Creative filters Î p.274
Resize Î p.277
Printing
PictBridge Î p.282
Print Order (DPOF) Î p.289
Photobook Set-up Î p.293
Customization
Custom Functions (C.Fn) Î p.296
My Menu Î p.303
Software
Downloading images to a
personal computer Î p.361
Software instruction manual
Î p.367
COPY
10
1
Introduction 2
Item Check List................................................................................. 3
Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 4
Chapters........................................................................................... 5
Contents at a Glance........................................................................ 6
Index to Features ............................................................................. 8
Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 16
Quick Start Guide ........................................................................... 18
Nomenclature ................................................................................. 20
Getting Started 27
Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 28
Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 30
Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 31
Using the LCD Monitor ................................................................... 33
Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 34
Setting the Time Zone, Date and Time .......................................... 36
Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 38
Attaching and Detaching a Lens .................................................... 39
About the Lens Image Stabilizer .................................................... 41
Basic Operation.............................................................................. 42
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 44
3 Menu Operations.................................................................. 46
Formatting the Card ....................................................................... 48
Switching the LCD Monitor Display ................................................ 50
Feature Guide ................................................................................ 52
d Touch Screen Operations .......................................................... 53
Contents
COPY
11
Contents
2
3
Basic Shooting and Image Playback 57
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ................... 58
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) .........................61
7 Disabling Flash ......................................................................... 63
C Creative Auto Shooting.............................................................64
2 Shooting Portraits ...................................................................... 67
3 Shooting Landscapes ...............................................................68
4 Shooting Close-ups ...................................................................69
5 Shooting Moving Subjects ........................................................ 70
8: Special Scene Mode ............................................................. 71
6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) ....................................72
F Shooting Night Scenes Handheld.............................................. 73
G Shooting Backlit Scenes............................................................74
Q Quick Control............................................................................. 76
Shoot by Ambience Selection .........................................................77
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type....................................................81
x Image Playback ........................................................................ 84
Creative Shooting 85
d: Program AE............................................................................... 86
Setting the Image-Recording Quality .............................................. 88
i: Changing the ISO Speed ....................................................... 92
A
Optimal Image Characteristics for the Subject (Picture Style)
...95
f: Changing the Autofocus Operation (AF Operation) ................. 97
S Selecting the AF Point ............................................................100
Subjects Difficult to Focus.............................................................103
MF: Manual Focusing.................................................................103
i Continuous Shooting ............................................................... 104
j Using the Self-timer .................................................................106
D Using the Built-in Flash .............................................................107
COPY
12
Contents
5
4Advanced Shooting 109
s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement ..................................... 110
f: Changing the Depth of Field ................................................ 112
Depth of Field Preview................................................................114
a: Manual Exposure ................................................................... 115
q Changing the Metering Mode ..................................................117
Setting Exposure Compensation...................................................119
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ................................................. 121
A Locking the Exposure (AE Lock)............................................. 123
A Locking the Flash Exposure (FE Lock) ................................... 124
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast (Auto Lighting Optimizer)
... 125
Noise Reduction Settings ............................................................. 126
Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction
.... 129
A Customizing Image Characteristics (Picture Style) .............. 132
A
Registering Preferred Image Characteristics (Picture Style)
..... 135
B: Matching the Light Source (White Balance)......................... 137
u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source ........................ 139
Setting the Color Reproduction Range (Color Space).................. 141
Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Shake ..................................... 142
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 145
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor .............................................. 146
Shooting Function Settings .......................................................... 151
U Using Creative Filters ............................................................. 152
A Menu Function Settings ......................................................... 156
Changing the Autofocus Method (AF Method) ............................. 159
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter ............................................ 168
MF: Focus Manually ..................................................................... 170
COPY
13
Contents
7
6Shooting Movies 173
k Shooting Movies .....................................................................174
Autoexposure Shooting.............................................................. 174
Manual Exposure Shooting ........................................................177
Shooting Still Photos ..................................................................182
Shooting Function Settings ........................................................... 184
Setting the Movie-recording Size ..................................................185
Shooting Video Snapshots............................................................ 187
Movie Menu Function Settings......................................................196
Handy Features 203
Handy Features ............................................................................204
Disabling the Beeper.................................................................. 204
Card Reminder........................................................................... 204
Setting the Image Review Time .................................................204
Setting the Auto Power-off Time ................................................205
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................... 205
Creating and Selecting a Folder.................................................206
File Numbering Methods ............................................................208
Setting Copyright Information.....................................................210
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images................................................212
Checking Camera Settings ........................................................213
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings............................214
Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically......217
Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color...........................217
Setting the Flash ........................................................................... 218
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning....................................................223
Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................224
Manual Sensor Cleaning...............................................................226
COPY
14
Contents
11
10
9
8Wireless Flash Photography 229
Using Wireless Flash.................................................................... 230
Easy Wireless Flash Shooting...................................................... 231
Custom Wireless Flash Shooting ................................................. 234
Other Settings .............................................................................. 238
Image Playback 241
H I Searching for Images Quickly............................................ 242
u/y Magnified View................................................................... 244
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen........................................ 245
b Rotating the Image.................................................................. 247
Setting Ratings ............................................................................. 248
Q Quick Control During Playback............................................... 250
k Enjoying Movies ..................................................................... 252
k Playing Movies ....................................................................... 254
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................. 256
Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 258
Viewing the Images on TV ........................................................... 262
K Protecting Images................................................................... 266
L Erasing Images........................................................................ 268
B: Shooting Information Display ............................................. 270
Post-Processing Images 273
U Applying Creative Filters to the Image.................................... 274
S Resizing a JPEG Image ......................................................... 277
Printing Images 279
Preparing to Print ......................................................................... 280
wPrinting.................................................................................... 282
Cropping the Image ................................................................... 287
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ......................................... 289
W Direct Printing with DPOF....................................................... 292
p Specifying Images for a Photobook......................................... 293
COPY
15
Contents
15
13
14
12
Customizing the Camera 295
Setting Custom Functions.............................................................296
Custom Function Settings.............................................................298
C.Fn I: Exposure ........................................................................298
C.Fn II: Image ............................................................................299
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive ............................................................300
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others..........................................................301
Registering My Menu .................................................................... 303
Reference 305
Using a Household Power Outlet..................................................306
Remote Control Shooting..............................................................307
External Speedlites ....................................................................... 309
Using Eye-Fi Cards.......................................................................311
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode .............. 314
System Map ..................................................................................316
Menu Settings ............................................................................... 318
Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................324
Error Codes................................................................................... 337
Specifications................................................................................338
Handling Precautions: EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM,
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM .................................................346
Safety Warnings............................................................................349
Downloading Images to a Personal Computer 361
Downloading Images to a Personal Computer .............................362
About the Software .......................................................................364
Installing the Software................................................................... 366
Software Instruction Manual .........................................................367
Quick Reference Guide and Index 369
Quick Reference Guide.................................................................370
Index .............................................................................................382
COPY
16
Camera Care
This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock.
The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you
accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult the nearest Canon
Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry cloth. If the camera
has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.
Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such
as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near
anything emitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna. Strong
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.
Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight.
High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and
focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean
the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest
Canon Service Center.
Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to
prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera
misoperation.
If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and
battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before
using the camera.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to
check that the camera is still working.
Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and
corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is
an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera
checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure
it is working properly.
Handling Precautions
COPY
17
Handling Precautions
LCD Monitor
Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead pixels
displaying only black or red, etc., among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.
Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.
If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.
The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures, or look black
in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything
metallic.
Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.
Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having
static electricity.
Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
Store the card in a case.
Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the
lens with the rear end up and attach the lens caps to
avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.
Cautions Regarding Prolonged Use
If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or
movie shooting for a prolonged period, the camera may
become hot. Although this is not a malfunction, holding
the hot camera for a long period can cause slight skin
burns.
About Smudges Adhering to the Front of the Sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant from the
camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If visible spots still
remain after the automatic sensor cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a
Canon Service Center is recommended.
Contacts
COPY
18
Quick Start Guide
1Insert the battery (p.30).
To charge the battery, see page 28.
2Insert a card (p.31).
With the card’s label facing
toward the back of the
camera, insert it into the card
slot.
3Attach the lens (p.39).
Align the lens’ white or red index
with the camera’s index in the
matching color.
4Set the lens focus mode switch
to <AF> (p.39).
5Set the power switch to <1>,
and set the Mode Dial to <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto) (p.58).
All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
White index Red index
COPY
19
Quick Start Guide
6Flip out the LCD monitor (p.33).
When the LCD monitor displays the
time zone and date/time setting
screens, see page 36.
7Focus the subject (p.43).
Look through the viewfinder and aim
the viewfinder center over the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway, and
the camera will focus the subject.
If necessary, the built-in flash will be
raised automatically.
8Take the picture (p.43).
Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
9Review the picture (p.204).
The captured image will be
displayed for 2 sec. on the LCD
monitor.
To display the image again, press
the <x> button (p.84).
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View
Shooting” (p.145).
To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.84).
To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.268).
COPY
20
The names in bold indicate the parts mentioned up until the “Basic
Shooting and Image Playback” section.
Nomenclature
Built-in flash/AF-assist beam
(p.107/101)
EF Lens mount index (p.39)
Power switch (p.34)
Mode Dial (p.24)
<i> ISO speed
setting button (p.92)
<6> Main Dial
S
hutter button
(p.43)
EF-S Lens mount index
(p.39)
Strap mount
(p.27)
<q/C>
Audio/video OUT/
Digital terminal (p.265, 280, 362)
Body cap (p.39)
Lens release button
(p.40)
Grip
Contacts (p.17)
Red-eye
reduction/
Self-timer
lamp
(p.108/106)
Mirror (p.142, 226)
Remote control
s
ensor
(
p.142, 307)
Hot shoe (p.309)
Flash-sync contacts
Microphone (p.174)
<V> Focal plane
mark (p.69)
<D> Flash button
(p.107)
Lens mount
Terminal cover
Lens lock pin Depth-of-field preview
button (p.114)
<F> Remote control terminal
(p.308)
<Y> External microphone
IN terminal (p.198)
<D> HDMI mini OUT
terminal (p.262)
COPY
21
Nomenclature
Display off sensor (p.50, 217) Dioptric adjustment knob (p.42)
Card slot
cover (p.31)
Access lamp (p.32)
Battery compartment
cover release lever (p.30)
Battery compartment cover
(p.30)
Viewfinder eyepiece
Eyecup (p.308)
<A> Live View shooting/
Movie shooting button (p.146/174)
<A/Hy> AE lock/
FE lock button/
Index/Reduce button
(p.123/124/242/244, 287)
<S/u>
AF point selection/
Magnify button
(p.100/244, 287)
Speaker
(p.254)
DC cord hole
(p.306)
<B> Info button
(p.50, 84, 148, 179, 213)
<M> Menu
button (p.46)
LCD monitor/
Touch screen
(p.33, 46, 205/
53, 245, 255)
<O> Aperture/
Exposure compensation
button (p.115/119)
<Q/l> Quick Control button/
Direct print button (p.44/285)
<S> Cross keys (p.46)
<WB> White balance selection button (p.137)
<XA> Picture Style selection button (p.95)
<Yi／Q> Drive mode selection button (p.104, 106)
<Zf> AF operation selection button (p.97)
<0> Setting button (p.46) <L> Erase button (p.268)
Card slot (p.31)
<x> Playback button (p.84)
Tripod socket
COPY
22
Nomenclature
Shooting Settings (in Creative Zone modes, p.24)
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Shutter speed
Shooting mode
Aperture
ISO speed (p.92)
Self-timer countdown
Number of possible shots
Battery check (p.35)
zxcn
Quick Control icon (p.44)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation
amount (p.119)
AEB range (p.121)
White balance (p.137)
Q Auto
W Daylight
E Shade
R Cloudy
Y Tungsten light
U White fluorescent light
I Flash
O Custom
Image-recording
quality (p.88)
73 Large/Fine
83 Large/Normal
74 Medium/Fine
84 Medium/Normal
7a Small 1/Fine
8a Small 1/Normal
b Small 2 (Fine)
c Small 3 (Fine)
1+73
RAW+Large/Fine
1 RAW
A
F operation (p.97)
X
One-Shot AF
9
AI Focus AF
Z
AI Servo AF
MF
Manual Focus
Picture Style (p.95)
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.125)
Main Dial pointer
Multi Shot Noise Reduction (p.126)
Highlight tone priority
(p.299)
Built-in flash settings
(p.220)
y Flash exposure
compensation (p.120)
0 External flash
exposure compensation
Number of possible shots
during WB bracketing
Eye-Fi transmission status (p.311)
GPS connection indicator
Drive mode (p.104, 106)
u Single shooting
i Continuous shooting
Q Self-timer:10 sec/Remote control
l Self-timer:2 sec
q Self-timer:Continuous
Metering mode (p.117)
q Evaluative metering
w Partial metering
r Spot metering
e Center-weighted average metering
u White balance correction (p.139)
B White balance bracketing (p.140)
COPY
23
Nomenclature
Viewfinder Information
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
AF point activation indicator <•>
AF points
<D> Flash-ready
Improper FE lock warning
Max. burst
<o>
Focus
confirmation light
<e> High-speed sync
(FP flash)
<d> FE lock/FEB in-progress
<y> Flash exposure
compensation
Card full warning (FuLL)
Card error warning (Card)
No card warning (Card)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount
AEB range
Red-eye reduction lamp-on indicator
<A> Highlight tone priority
<0> Monochrome
shooting
ISO speed
Shutter speed
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Built-in flash recycling (D buSY)
Aperture
Spot metering circle
Focusing screen
<A> AE lock/
AEB in-progress
<u>
White balance
correction
<i>
ISO speed
COPY
24
Nomenclature
Mode Dial
The Mode Dial includes the Basic Zone modes and Creative Zone
modes.
Basic Zone
All you do is press the shutter button.
The camera sets everything to suit the
subject or scene.
A: Scene Intelligent Auto (p.58)
7: Flash Off (p.63)
C: Creative Auto (p.64)
Creative Zone
These modes give you more control for
shooting various subjects.
d: Program AE (p.86)
s: Shutter-priority AE (p.110)
f: Aperture-priority AE (p.112)
a: Manual exposure (p.115)
Image Zone
2: Portrait (p.67)
3: Landscape (p.68)
4: Close-up (p.69)
5: Sports (p.70)
8: Special Scene Mode (p.71)
6: Night Portrait (p.72)
F: Handheld Night Scene (p.73)
G: HDR Backlight Control (p.74)
COPY
25
Nomenclature
Lens
Lens without a distance scale
Lens with a distance scale
Image Stabilizer switch (p.41)
Lens mount index (p.39)
Contacts (p.17)
Zoom ring (p.40)
Focus mode switch (p.39)
Focusing ring (p.103, 170)
Hood mount (p.344) Zoom position index (p.40)
Filter thread
(front of lens) (p.344)
Focus mode switch (p.39)
Zoom ring (p.40)
Image Stabilizer switch (p.41) Lens mount index (p.39)
Contacts (p.17)
Hood mount (p.344)
Distance scale
Zoom position index (p.40)
Focusing ring (p.103, 170)
Filter thread
(front of lens) (p.344)
COPY
26
Nomenclature
Battery Charger LC-E8
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E8 (p.28).
Battery Charger LC-E8E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E8 (p.28).
Battery pack slot
Power plug
Charge lamp
Full-charge lamp
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.
Power cord
Power cord socket
Battery pack slot
Charge lamp
Full-charge lamp
COPY
27
Getting Started
This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start
shooting and basic camera operations.
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through
the camera’s strap mount eyelet
from the bottom. Then pass it
through the strap’s buckle as shown
in the illustration. Pull the strap to
take up any slack and make sure
the strap will not loosen from the
buckle.
The eyepiece cover is also
attached to the strap (p.308).
Eyepiece cover
COPY
28
1Remove the protective cover.
Detach the protective cover provided
with the battery.
2Attach the battery.
As shown in the illustration, attach the
battery securely to the charger.
To detach the battery, follow the
above procedure in reverse.
3Recharge the battery.
For LC-E8
As shown by the arrow, flip out the
battery charger’s prongs and insert
the prongs into a power outlet.
For LC-E8E
Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the plug into a
power outlet.
XRecharging starts automatically and
the charge lamp lights up in orange.
XWhen the battery is fully recharged,
the full-charge lamp will light up in
green.
It takes approx. 2 hours to fully recharge a completely
exhausted battery at 23°C / 73°F. The time required to recharge
the battery will vary greatly depending on the ambient
temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.
For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (6
°
C - 10
°
C /
43
°
F - 50
°
F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hours).
Charging the Battery
LC-E8
LC-E8E
COPY
29
Charging the Battery
Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Recharge the battery before using.
Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be
used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose
its capacity.
After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small
amount of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge
and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover
(provided) attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged may
lower the battery’s performance.
The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/
60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available
plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any
portable voltage transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can
damage the battery charger.
If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully
charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Purchase a new battery.
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger
After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
at least 3 sec.
Do not charge any battery other than a Battery Pack LP-E8.
Battery Pack LP-E8 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an
incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.
COPY
30
Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E8 into the camera.
1Open the cover.
Slide the lever as shown by the
arrows and open the cover.
2Insert the battery.
Insert the end with the battery
contacts.
Insert the battery until it locks in
place.
3Close the cover.
Press the cover until it snaps shut.
Open the cover and remove the
battery.
Press the battery release lever as shown
by the arrow and remove the battery.
To prevent short circuiting of the
battery contacts, be sure to attach the
protective cover (provided, p.28) to
the battery.
Installing and Removing the Battery
Installing the Battery
Removing the Battery
After opening the battery compartment cover, be careful not to swing it back
further. Otherwise, the hinge may break.
COPY
31
The card (sold separately) can be an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory
card. SDHC and SDXC memory cards with UHS-I can also be used.
The captured images are recorded onto the card.
Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to
enable writing/erasing.
1Open the cover.
Slide the cover as shown by the
arrows to open it.
2Insert the card.
As shown by the illustration, face
the card’s label side toward you
and insert it until it clicks in place.
3Close the cover.
Close the cover and slide it in the
direction shown by the arrows until it
snaps shut.
When you set the power switch to
<1>, the number of possible shots
(p.35) will be displayed on the LCD
monitor.
Installing and Removing the Card
Installing the Card
Write-protect switch
Possible shots
The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the
card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.
Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent
you from forgetting to insert a card (p.204).
COPY
32
Installing and Removing the Card
1Open the cover.
Set the power switch to <2>.
Make sure the access lamp is off,
then open the cover.
If [Recording...] is displayed, close
the cover.
2Remove the card.
Gently push in the card, then let go to
eject it.
Pull the card straight out, then close
the cover.
Removing the Card
Access lamp
When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to or read by the card, being erased, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also,
never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or banging the camera around.
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (p.208).
If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove
and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all
the images and then format the card with the camera (p.48). The card
may then return to normal.
Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.
COPY
33
After you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live
View shooting, shoot movies, and play back images and movies. You
can change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor.
1Flip out the LCD monitor.
2Rotate the LCD monitor.
When the LCD monitor is swung out,
you can rotate it up or down, or face it
forward toward the subject.
The indicated angle is only
approximate.
3Face it toward you.
Normally, face the LCD monitor
toward you.
Using the LCD Monitor
180°
175°
90°
Be careful not to force and break the hinge when rotating the LCD monitor.
When not using the camera, close the LCD monitor with the screen
facing inward. This will protect the screen.
During Live View shooting or movie shooting, facing the LCD monitor
toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen.
Depending on the angle of the LCD monitor, the display may turn off right
before the LCD monitor is closed.
COPY
34
If you turn on the power switch and the time zone and date/time
setting screens appear, see page 36 to set the time zone and date/
time.
<k> : The camera turns on. You can
shoot movies (p.173).
<1> : The camera turns on. You can
shoot still photos.
<2> : The camera is turned off and
does not operate. Set to this
position when not using the
camera.
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, sensor
cleaning will be executed automatically. (A small sound may be
heard.) During the sensor cleaning, the LCD monitor will display
<f>.
You can still shoot during sensor cleaning. Press the shutter button
halfway (p.43) to stop the sensor cleaning and take a picture.
If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and
not a problem.
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after
approx. 30 seconds of non-operation. To turn on the camera again,
just press the shutter button halfway (p.43).
You can set the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]
(p.205).
Turning on the Power
About the Automatic Self-Cleaning Sensor
3 About Auto Power Off
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
card finishes recording the image.
COPY
35
Turning on the Power
When the power is turned on, the battery level will be indicated in one of
four levels.
z: Battery level is sufficient.
x: Battery level is low, but the
camera can still be used.
c: Battery will be exhausted soon.
(Blinks)
n: Recharge the battery.
Battery Life [Approx. number of shots]
The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, no Live
View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing
standards.
Possible shots with Battery Grip BG-E8
•
With two LP-E8 batteries: approx. twice as many shots as with the camera alone.
• With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries (at 23°C / 73°F): approx. 470 shots with
no flash, approx. 270 shots with 50% flash use.
z Checking the Battery Level
Temperature At 23°C / 73°FAt 0°C / 32°F
No Flash 550 470
50% Flash Use 440 400
The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor often.
The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual
shooting conditions.
The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on
the lens used, the number of possible shots may be lower.
For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 147.
COPY
36
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the time zone and date/time
have been reset, the Time zone and Date/Time setting screens will appear.
Follow the steps below to set the time zone first. You can also set the time zone
of your current address. Then if you travel to another time zone, you can simply
set your destination’s time zone so that the correct date/time is recorded.
Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based
on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.
[London] is set by default.
Press the <M> button.
Under the [52] tab, select [Time
zone], then press <0>.
Press the <
U
> key to select a time zone.
Press <0> so <a> is displayed.
Press the <V> key to select the time
zone, then press <0>.
1Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button.
2Under the [52] tab, select [Date/
Time].
Press the <U> key to select the
[52] tab.
Press the <V> key to select [Date/
Time], then press <0>.
3
Setting the Time Zone, Date and Time
Set the Time Zone
Set the Date and Time
The menu setting procedure is explained on pages 46-47.
The time displayed on the lower right is the time difference compared
with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If you do not see your time
zone, set the time zone while referring to the difference with UTC.
COPY
37
3 Setting the Time Zone, Date and Time
3Set the date and time.
Press the <U> key to select the
date or time number.
Press <0> so <a> is displayed.
Press the <V> key to set the
number, then press <0>. (Returns
to <b>.)
4Set the daylight saving time.
Set it if necessary.
Press the <U> key to select [Y].
Press <0> so <a> is displayed.
Press the <V> key to select [Z],
then press <0>.
When the daylight saving time is set
to [Z], the time set in step 3 will
advance by 1 hour. If [Y] is set, the
daylight saving time will be canceled
and the time will go back by 1 hour.
5Exit the setting.
Press the <U> key to select [OK],
then press <0>.
XThe date/time and daylight saving
time will be set and the menu will
reappear.
If you store the camera without the battery or if the camera’s battery
becomes exhausted, the time zone and date/time may be reset. If this
happens, set the time zone and date/time again.
The date/time that was set will start from when you press <0> in step 5.
After changing the time zone, check that the correct date/time has been set.
You can also set the daylight saving time with [52: Time zone].
The [52: Time zone] and [52: Date/Time] daylight saving time settings
are linked.
COPY
38
1Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
2Under the [52] tab, select
[LanguageK].
Press the <U> key to select the
[52] tab.
Press the <V> key to select
[LanguageK] (the sixth item from
the top), then press <0>.
3Set the desired language.
Press the <S> key to select the
language, then press <0>.
XThe interface language will change.
3 Selecting the Interface Language
COPY
39
The camera is compatible with all Canon EF lenses and EF-S lenses.
The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.
1Remove the caps.
Remove the rear lens cap and the
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
2Attach the lens.
Align the lens’ red or white index with
the camera’s index matching the
same color. Turn the lens as shown
by the arrow until it clicks in place.
3Set the lens focus mode switch to
<AF>.
<AF> stands for Autofocus.
If it is set to <MF> (manual focus),
autofocus will not operate.
4Remove the front lens cap.
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
White index
Red index
Minimizing Dust
When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the
body cap to the camera.
Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
COPY
40
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
To zoom, turn the zoom ring on the lens
with your fingers.
If you want to zoom, do it before
focusing. Turning the zoom ring after
achieving focus may throw off the
focus.
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrows.
Turn the lens until it stops, then
detach it.
Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
About Zooming
Detaching the Lens
Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
If you purchased a lens kit with the EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
or EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens, see “Handling Precautions”
on page 346.
Image Conversion Factor
Since the image sensor size is
smaller than the 35mm film
format, it will look like the lens
focal length is increased by
approx. 1.6x.
Image sensor size (Approx.)
(22.3 x 14.9 mm / 0.88 x 0.59 in.)
35mm image size
(36 x 24 mm / 1.42 x 0.94 in.)
COPY
41
When you use the IS lens’ built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is
corrected to obtain a sharper shot. The procedure explained here is
based on the EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.
* IS stands for Image Stabilizer.
1Set the IS switch to <1>.
Also set the camera’s power switch to
<1>.
2Press the shutter button halfway.
XThe Image Stabilizer will operate.
3Take the picture.
When the picture looks steady in the
viewfinder, press the shutter button
completely to take the picture.
About the Lens Image Stabilizer
The Image Stabilizer cannot correct “subject blur”, when the subject
moves at the time of exposure.
For bulb exposures, set the IS switch to <2>. If <1> is set, Image
Stabilizer misoperation may occur.
The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as
on a rocking boat.
The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens focus mode switch set to
either <AF> or <MF>.
When using a tripod, you can still shoot with the IS switch set to <1>
with no problem. However, to save battery power, setting the IS switch to
<2> is recommended.
The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a
monopod.
Some IS lenses enable you to switch the IS mode manually to suit the
shooting conditions. However, the following lenses switch the IS mode
automatically:
• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM • EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II • EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
• EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
COPY
42
Turn the dioptric adjustment
knob.
Turn the knob left or right until the
nine AF points in the viewfinder look
sharp.
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5.
To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
Basic Operation
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Holding the Camera
If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder
image, using E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (10 types, sold
separately) is recommended.
Vertical shooting
Horizontal shooting
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 145.
COPY
43
Basic Operation
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder
(0).
Pressing completely
This releases the shutter and takes the
picture.
Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
Shutter Button
If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first
or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely
immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.
Even during menu display, image playback, or image recording, you can
instantly go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button
halfway.
COPY
44
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the
LCD monitor. This is called the Quick Control screen.
1Press the <Q> button.
XThe Quick Control screen will appear
(7).
2Set the desired function.
Press the <S> key to select a
function.
XThe selected function and Feature
guide (p.52) will appear.
Turn the <6> dial to change the
setting.
3Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
XThe captured image will be displayed.
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Basic Zone modes Creative Zone modes
For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and the setting
procedure, see page 76.
In steps 1 and 2, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen (p.53).
COPY
45
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Select the desired function and press
<0>. The function’s setting screen
will appear.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to change the setting.
There are also functions that are set
by pressing the <B> button.
Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to the Quick Control screen.
Sample Quick Control Screen
Function Setting Screen
Shutter speed (p.110)
AF operation (p.97)
White balance (p.137)
Shooting mode* (p.24)
Highlight tone priority* (p.299)
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.125)
Metering mode (p.117)
Picture Style (p.95)
Exposure compensation/
AEB setting (p.119, 121)
Flash exposure
compensation (p.120)
ISO speed (p.92)
Image-recording quality (p.88)
Aperture (p.112)
Built-in flash settings
(p.234)
White balance bracketing (p.140)
Drive mode (p.104, 106)
White balance correction (p.139)
Return
* Asterisked functions cannot be set with the Quick Control screen.
<0>
Ð
COPY
46
You can set various settings with the menus such as the image-
recording quality, date/time, etc. While looking at the LCD monitor, use
the <M> button, <S> cross keys, and <0> button on the back of
the camera to operate the menus.
3 Menu Operations
<S> Cross keys
Tab
Menu items
Menu settings
z Shooting
LCD monitor
5 Set-up
9 My Menu
<0> button
3 Playback
The menu tabs and items displayed will differ depending on the
shooting mode.
Menu Screen
Basic Zone modes
Creative Zone modes
<M> button
A Live View Shooting
Movie shooting
COPY
47
3 Menu Operations
1Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
2Select a tab.
Press the <U> key to select a
menu tab.
For example, the [z3] tab refers to
the screen displayed when the z
(Shooting) tab’s third dot [ ] from
the left is selected.
3Select the desired item.
Press the <V> key to select the
item, then press <0>.
4Select the setting.
Press the <V> or <U> key to
select the desired setting. (Some
settings require you to press either
the <V> or <U> key to select it.)
The current setting is indicated in blue.
5Set the desired setting.
Press <0> to set it.
6Exit the setting.
Press the <M> button to return to
the shooting settings display.
Menu Setting Procedure
In step 2, you can also turn the <6> dial to select a menu tab.
In steps 2 to 5, you can also use the LCD monitor’s
touch screen
(p.53).
The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.
To cancel, press the <M> button.
For details about each menu item, see page 318.
COPY
48
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with the camera.
When the card is formatted, all images and data in the card will
be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make
sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer
the images to a computer, etc., before formatting the card.
1Select [Format card].
Under the [51] tab, select [Format
card], then press <0>.
2Format the card.
Select [OK], then press <0>.
XThe card will be formatted.
XWhen the formatting is completed,
the menu will reappear.
For low-level formatting, press the
<L> button to append [Low level
format] with a checkmark <X>, then
select [OK].
3 Formatting the Card
COPY
49
3 Formatting the Card
The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full with images or data.
A card-related error is displayed (p.337).
Execute [Format card] in the following cases:
About Low-level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting if the card’s recording or reading speed seems
slow or if you want to totally erase all data in the card.
Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors in the card, the
formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.
You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this
case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the card as
usual.
When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the
card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to
prevent the personal data from being leaked.
Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software in the card must be
installed in your computer. Then format the card with the camera.
The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
COPY
50
The LCD monitor can display the shooting settings screen, menu
screen, captured images, etc.
When you turn on the power, the
shooting settings will be displayed.
When your eye is near the viewfinder
eyepiece, the display off sensor
(p.21, 217) will turn off the LCD
monitor to prevent glare. When your
eye leaves the viewfinder eyepiece,
the LCD monitor will turn on again.
By pressing the <B> button, you
can switch the LCD monitor screen
as follows: Display the shooting
settings screen (p.22), turn off the
LCD monitor screen, or display the
camera settings screen (p.213).
Switching the LCD Monitor Display
Shooting Settings
Appears when you press the
<M> button. Press the
button again to return to the
shooting settings screen.
Appears when you press the
<x> button. Press the button
again to return to the shooting
settings screen.
Menu Functions Captured Image
COPY
51
Switching the LCD Monitor Display
With [52: LCD auto off], you can prevent the LCD monitor from turning
off automatically (p.217).
Even when the menu screen or captured image is displayed, pressing
the shutter button will enable you to shoot immediately.
If you wear sunglasses and look through the viewfinder eyepiece, the
LCD monitor may not turn off automatically. If this occurs, press the
<B> button to turn off the LCD monitor.
Nearby fluorescent lighting may cause the LCD monitor to turn off. If this
occurs, take the camera away from the fluorescent lighting.
COPY
52
The Feature guide is a simple description of the respective function or
option. It is displayed when you change the shooting mode or use the
Quick Control screen to set a shooting function, in Live View shooting,
movie shooting, or during playback. When you select a function or
option on the Quick Control screen, the Feature guide description is
displayed. The Feature guide turns off when you tap the description or
proceed with the operation.
Shooting mode (Sample)
Quick Control (Sample)
Select [Feature guide].
Under the [53] tab, select [Feature
guide], then press <0>. Select
[Disable], then press <0>.
Feature Guide
3 Disabling the Feature Guide
Shooting functions Live View shooting Playback
COPY
53
The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can operate with
your fingers.
Quick Control (Sample display)
Use your finger to tap (touch and let
go) the LCD monitor.
By tapping, you can select menus,
icons, etc., displayed on the LCD
monitor.
Icons that you can tap are displayed
in a frame (excluding the menu
screen).
For example, when you tap [Q], the
Quick Control screen appears. By
tapping [2], you can return to the
preceding screen.
Operations possible by tapping the screen
Setting menu functions after pressing the <M> button
Quick Control
Setting functions after pressing the <i>, <S>, <WB>,
<XA>, <Yi/Q>, or <Zf> button
Setting functions during Live View shooting
Setting functions during movie shooting
Playback operations
d Touch Screen Operations
Tap
COPY
54
d Touch Screen Operations
Menu screen (Sample display)
Slide your finger while touching the
LCD monitor.
Scale display (Sample display)
Operations possible by dragging your finger on the screen
Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <M> button
Setting a scale control
Setting functions during Live View shooting
Setting functions during movie shooting
Playback operations (swipe)
If [z1: Beep] is set to [Touch to ], the
beep will not sound during touch
operations.
Drag
3 Silencing the Beep during Touch Operations
COPY
55
d Touch Screen Operations
1Select [Touch control].
Under the [53] tab, select [Touch
control], then press <0>.
2Set the Touch control.
Select [Enable].
Setting it to [Disable] will disable
touch operations.
3 Touch Control Settings
Cautions for Touch Screen Operations
Since the LCD monitor is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp
objects such as your fingernail, ballpoint pens, etc., for touch operations.
Do not use wet fingers for touch screen operations.
If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your fingers are wet, the touch
screen may not respond or misoperation may occur. In such a case, turn
off the power and wipe the LCD monitor with a cloth.
Do not attach any protective sheet (commercially available) or sticker on
the LCD monitor. It may make the touch operation response slow.
COPY
COPY
57
Basic Shooting and
Image Playback
This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes
on the Mode Dial for best results and how to play back
images.
With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot while the
camera sets everything automatically (p.76, 314). Also, to
prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations, the main
shooting settings cannot be changed.
B
a
s
i
c
Z
o
n
e
If you set the Mode Dial to <8> while the LCD monitor is off,
press the <Q> button to check the shooting mode before shooting
(p.71).
COPY
58
<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus
automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.61).
1Set the Mode Dial to <A>.
2Aim any AF point over the
subject.
All the AF points will be used to focus,
and generally the closest object will
be focused.
Aiming the center AF point over the
subject will make focusing easier.
3Focus the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway, and
the lens focusing ring will rotate to
focus.
XThe dot inside the AF point achieving
focus flashes briefly in red. At the
same time, the beeper will sound and
the focus confirmation light <o> in
the viewfinder will light up.
XIf necessary, the built-in flash will be
raised automatically.
A
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
AF point
Focus confirmation light
COPY
59
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
4Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
XThe captured image will be displayed
for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.
After taking the picture, retract the
built-in flash by pushing it down with
your fingers.
The focus confirmation light <o> blinks and focus is not
achieved.
Aim the AF point over an area having good contrast, then press the
shutter button halfway (p.43). If you are too close to the subject,
move away and try again.
Multiple AF points flash simultaneously.
This indicates that focus is achieved at all those AF points. When the
AF point covering the desired subject flashes, take the picture.
The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus confirmation
light <o> does not light up.)
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving
subject. (The focus confirmation light <o> does not light up.) You
can take sharp pictures of a moving subject.
Note that focus lock (p.61) will not work in this case.
Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),
set it to <AF> (autofocus).
FAQ
The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained, use a Creative
Zone mode and select a Picture Style other than <D> and shoot (p.95).
COPY
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
60
The flash was raised even though it was daylight.
For a backlit subject, the flash may pop up to help lighten the
subject’s dark areas. If you do not want the flash to fire, set it to
Flash Off (p.63). Except for the flash setting, the settings will be the
same as in <A>.
The flash fired and the picture came out extremely bright.
Move father from the subject and shoot. When shooting flash
photography, if the subject is too close to the camera, the picture
may come out extremely bright (overexposure).
In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.
Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to
fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called AF-assist
beam. Its effective range is approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.
When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out
unnaturally dark.
You were too close to the subject and the lens barrel created a
shadow. Move further away from the subject. If a hood is attached to
the lens, remove it before taking the flash picture.
COPY
61
Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to
create a balanced background and good perspective.
In the <A> mode, while you press the shutter button halfway to focus
a still subject, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the
shot and press the shutter button completely to take the picture. This is
called “focus lock”. Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone
modes (except <5> ).
In the <A> mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)
while or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus the subject
continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long as you
keep aiming the AF point on the subject while pressing the shutter
button halfway, the focusing will be continuous. When you want to take
the picture, press the shutter button completely.
A
Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Recomposing the Shot
Shooting a Moving Subject
COPY
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
62
You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is
called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 145.
1Display the Live View image on
the LCD monitor.
Press the <A> button.
XThe Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
2Focus the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
XWhen focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
3Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely.
XThe picture will be taken and the
captured image is displayed on the
LCD monitor.
XAfter the image review ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
Press the <A> button to end the
Live View shooting.
You can also rotate the LCD monitor in different directions (p.33).
A Live View Shooting
Normal angle Low angle High angle
COPY
63
The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings
automatically. In places where flash photography is prohibited, use the
<7> (Flash Off) mode. This mode is also effective for capturing the
particular ambience of a scene, such as candlelight scenes.
Prevent camera shake if the numeric display in the viewfinder
blinks.
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the
viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady
or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to
reduce blur caused by camera shake.
Take portraits without flash.
In low-light conditions, tell the subject to keep still until the picture is
taken. If the person moves during the exposure, he or she may look
blurred in the picture.
7 Disabling Flash
Shooting Tips
COPY
64
In the <C> mode, you can easily change the depth of field, drive
mode, and flash firing. You can also choose the ambience you want to
convey in your images. The default settings are the same as the <A>
mode.
* CA stands for Creative Auto.
1Set the Mode Dial to <C>.
2Press the <Q> button. (7)
XThe Quick Control screen will appear.
3Set the desired function.
Press the <S> key to select the
function to be set.
XThe selected function and Feature
guide (p.52) will appear.
For setting procedure and details on
each function, see pages 65-66.
4Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
C Creative Auto Shooting
COPY
65
C Creative Auto Shooting
Pressing the <Q> button enables you to set the following:
(1) Ambience-based shots
You can choose the ambience you want to convey in your images.
Press the <U> key or turn the <6> dial to select the desired
ambience. You can also select it from a list by pressing <0>. For
details, see page 77.
(2) Blurring/sharpening the background
If you move the index mark toward the left, the background will look
more blurred. If you move it toward the right, the background will
look more in focus. If you want to blur the background, see “Shooting
Portraits” on page 67. Press the <U> key or turn the <6> dial to
select the desired ambience.
Depending on the lens and shooting conditions, the background
may not look so blurred. This function cannot be set (grayed out)
while the built-in flash is raised in the <a> or <D> mode. If flash is
used, this setting will not be applied.
Shutter speed (1)
(2)
(4)
Battery check Possible shots
ISO speed
Image-recording quality
Aperture
(3)
COPY
C Creative Auto Shooting
66
(3) Drive mode: Turn the <6> dial to set it as desired. You can also
select it from a list by pressing <0>.
<u>Single shooting:
Shoot one image at a time.
<i>Continuous shooting:
While you hold down the shutter button completely,
shots will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to
approx. 5 shots per sec.
<Q>Self-timer: 10sec./remote:
The picture is taken 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button. A remote controller can also be used.
<l>Self-timer: 2sec.:
The picture is taken 2 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
<q>Self-timer: Continuous:
Press the <V> key to set the number of multiple
shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10
seconds after you press the shutter button, the set
number of multiple shots will be taken.
(4) Flash firing: Turn the <6> dial to set it as desired. You can also
select it from a list by pressing <0>.
<a>Auto flash : The flash fires automatically when necessary.
<I>Flash on : The flash fires at all times.
<b>Flash off : The flash is disabled.
If you use an external Speedlite, [Flash firing] cannot be set.
When using the self-timer, see the notes on page 106.
When using <b>, see “Disabling Flash” on page 63.
COPY
67
The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human
subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and the hair look softer.
The further the distance between the subject and background,
the better.
The further the distance between the subject and background, the
more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand
out better in front of a plain, dark background.
Use a telephoto lens.
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with
the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.
Focus the face.
Check that the AF point covering the face flashes in red. For close-
ups of the face, focus the eyes.
2 Shooting Portraits
Shooting Tips
The default setting is <i> (Continuous shooting). If you hold down the
shutter button, you can shoot continuously to obtain different poses and
facial expressions (max. approx. 5 shots/sec.).
If necessary, the built-in flash will fire automatically.
COPY
68
Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery or to have
everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and
very sharp and crisp images.
With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.
When using the wide-angle end of a zoom lens, objects near and far
will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth
to landscapes.
Shooting night scenes.
Since the built-in flash will be disabled, this mode <3> is also good
for night scenes.
When shooting night scenes, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
3 Shooting Landscapes
Shooting Tips
The built-in flash will not fire even in backlit or low-light conditions.
COPY
69
When you want to photograph flowers or small things up close, use the
<4> (Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a
macro lens (sold separately).
Use a simple background.
A simple background makes the flower, etc., stand out better.
Move as close as possible to the subject.
Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses
have indications such as <40.25m/0.8ft>. The lens minimum
focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal plane) mark on
the top of the camera to the subject. If you are too close to the
subject, the focus confirmation light <o> will blink.
Under low light, the built-in flash will fire. If you are too close to the
subject and the bottom of the picture looks dark, move away from
the subject.
With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.
If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the
subject look larger.
4 Shooting Close-ups
Shooting Tips
COPY
70
To photograph a moving subject, whether it is a child running or a
moving vehicle, use the <5> (Sports) mode.
Use a telephoto lens.
Using a telephoto lens is recommended so you can shoot from afar.
Use the center AF point to focus.
Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter
button halfway to autofocus. During autofocusing, the beeper will
continue beeping softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the focus
confirmation light <o> will blink.
The default setting is <i> (Continuous shooting). When you want
to take the picture, press the shutter button completely. If you hold
down the shutter button, continuous shooting (max. approx. 5 shots
per sec.) and autofocusing will take effect to capture the movement
of the subject.
5 Shooting Moving Subjects
Shooting Tips
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinder’s
shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera steady
and shoot.
COPY
71
Select “Night Portrait”, “Handheld Night Scene”, or “HDR Backlight
Control” shooting mode. The camera sets everything to suit the
selected shooting mode.
1Set the Mode Dial to <8>.
2Press the <Q> button. (7)
XThe Quick Control screen will appear.
3Select the shooting mode.
Press the <V> or <U> key to
select the shooting mode icon.
Turn the <6> dial to select a
shooting mode.
You can also select the shooting
mode icon and press <0> to display
a selection of shooting modes from
which you can select one.
Available Shooting Modes in the <8> Mode
8: Special Scene Mode
Shooting Mode Page
6Night Portrait p.72
FHandheld Night Scene p.73
GHDR Backlight Control p.74
COPY
72
To shoot people at night and obtain a natural-looking night scene in the
background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode.
Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide
night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
Check the subject’s brightness.
Under low light, the built-in flash will fire automatically to obtain a
good exposure of the subject. You should then play back the image
to check the image brightness. If the subject looks dark, move
nearer and shoot again.
Also shoot in another shooting mode.
Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also
with <A> and <F> is recommended.
6
Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)
Shooting Tips
Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.
If you use the self-timer together with flash, the self-timer lamp will light
up briefly after the picture is taken.
See the caution on page 75.
COPY
73
Normally, a tripod is necessary to steady your camera when shooting a
night scene. However, with the <F> (Handheld Night Scene) mode,
you can shoot night scenes while handholding the camera. Four shots
are taken continuously for each picture, and the resulting image with
reduced camera shake is recorded.
Hold the camera firmly.
While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,
four shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if
there is significant misalignment in any of the four shots due to
camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.
For shots of people, turn on the flash.
If you want to include people in a night scene shot, press the <Q>
button to set <D> (Flash on).
To take a nice portrait, the first shot will use flash. Tell the person not
to move until all four continuous shots are taken.
F Shooting Night Scenes Handheld
Shooting Tips
See the cautions on page 75.
COPY
74
When shooting a scene having both bright and dark areas, use the
<G> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this
mode, three continuous shots are taken at different exposures. This
results in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the
blocked-up shadows caused by backlighting.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
Hold the camera firmly.
While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,
three shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if
there is significant misalignment in any of the three shots due to
camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.
G Shooting Backlit Scenes
Shooting Tips
Flash cannot be used. In low light, the AF-assist beam will be emitted
(p.101).
See the cautions on page 75.
COPY
75
Caution for <6> (Night Portrait) and <F> (Handheld Night Scene)
During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus dots of light such as
in a night scene. In such a case, you should set the AF method to [Quick
mode] and shoot. If it is still difficult to focus, set the lens’ focus mode
switch to [MF] and focus manually.
Cautions for <F> (Handheld Night Scene)
When shooting flash photography, if the subject is too close to the
camera, the picture may come out extremely bright (overexposure).
If you use flash to shoot a night scene with few lights, the shots may not
align correctly. This can result in a blurry photo.
If you use flash and the human subject is close to the background which
is also illuminated by the flash, the shots may not align correctly. This
can result in a blurry photo. Unnatural shadows and unsuitable colors
may also appear.
Shooting with an external Speedlite
• When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the zoom
position will be fixed to the wide end, regardless of the lens’ zoom position.
• When using a Speedlite with manual flash coverage switch, shoot with
the flash head retracted to the wide (normal) position.
Cautions for <G> (HDR Backlight Control)
Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and
may look irregular or have significant noise.
HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit
scenes or extremely high-contrast scenes.
Cautions for <F> (Handheld Night Scene) and <G> (HDR Backlight
Control)
Compared with other shooting modes, the shooting area will be smaller.
1+73 or 1 cannot be selected. Even if 1+73 or 1 has been
set for another shooting mode, the picture will be recorded in 73.
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement will leave
afterimages.
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or greatly misaligned
shots caused by camera shake.
Compared to normal shooting, recording the image to the card will take
longer. During the processing of the images, “BUSY” will be displayed
and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.
If the shooting mode is set to <F> or <G>, direct printing (p.280) is not
possible.
COPY
76
In Basic Zone modes when the shooting
settings screen is displayed, you can
press the <Q> button to display the
Quick Control screen. The table below
indicates the functions that can be set
with the Quick Control screen in each
Basic Zone mode.
1Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone mode.
2Press the <Q> button. (7)
XThe Quick Control screen will appear.
3Set the function.
Press the <S> key to select a function. (This step is not
necessary in the <A> and <7> modes.)
XThe selected function and Feature guide (p.52) will appear.
Press the <U> key or turn the <6
> dial to change the setting.
Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes
o: Default setting k: User selectable : Not selectable
* If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, it will revert
to the default settings (except the self-timer).
Q Quick Control
Function A 7 C2 3 4 5 8
6 F G
Drive
mode
u: Single shooting o o o k o o k o o o
i: Continuous shooting k k k o k k o k k k
Self-timer
(p.106)
Qk k k k k k k k k k
lk k k k k k k k k k
qk k k k k k k k k k
Flash
firing
:
a Automatic firing ooooo
D:
Flash on (Fires at all times)
k k
b: Flash off o k o o o o
Ambience-based shots (p.77) kkkkkkk
Light/scene-based shots (p.81) k k k k
Blurring/sharpening the background (p.65)
k
Example: Portrait mode
COPY
77
Except in the <A>, <7>, and <G> Basic Zone modes, you can
select the ambience for shooting.
1Set the Mode Dial to any of the
following modes: <C>, <2>,
<3>, <4>, <5>, or <8>.
If the shooting mode is <8>, set
one of the following: <F> or <6>.
2Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button to display the
Live View image.
XYou can check the ambience effect
on the screen.
3On the Quick Control screen,
select the desired ambience.
Press the <Q> button (7).
Press the <V> key to select [
Standard setting]. [Ambience-
based shots] will appear on the
screen.
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Ambience C2 3 4 5 8Ambience Effect
6 F
Standard setting kkkkkkk No setting
Vivid kkkkkkk
Low / Standard / Strong
Soft kkkkkkk
Low / Standard / Strong
Warm kkkkkkk
Low / Standard / Strong
Intense kkkkkkk
Low / Standard / Strong
Cool kkkkkkk
Low / Standard / Strong
Brighter kkkkkkk
Low / Medium / High
Darker kkkkkkk
Low / Medium / High
Monochrome kkkkkkk
Blue / B/W / Sepia
COPY
Shoot by Ambience Selection
78
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the desired
ambience.
XThe LCD monitor will display how the
image will look with the selected
ambience.
4Set the ambience effect.
Press the <V> key to select the
effect bar so that [Effect] appears at
the bottom.
Press the
<U>
key or turn the
<6>
dial to select the desired effect.
5Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
To shoot through the viewfinder, first
press the <A> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
If you change the shooting mode or
set the power switch to <2>, the
setting will revert back to
[Standard setting].
The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not
look exactly the same as the actual photo taken.
Using flash may minimize the ambience effect.
In bright outdoors, the Live View image you see on the screen may not
have exactly the same brightness or ambience as the actual photo. Set
[52: LCD brightness] to 4 and look at the image while the screen is
unaffected by stray light.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1. Then you can set [Ambience-
based shots] and [Effect] on the Quick Control screen.
COPY
79
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Ambience Settings
Standard setting
Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode.
Note that <2> has image characteristics geared for portraits and
<3> is geared for landscapes. Each ambience is a modification of
the respective shooting mode’s image characteristics.
Vivid
The subject will look sharp and vivid. It makes the photo look more
impressive than with [ Standard setting].
Soft
The subject will look softer and more dainty. Good for portraits, pets,
flowers, etc.
Warm
The subject will look softer with warmer colors. Good for portraits,
pets, and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look.
Intense
While the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is
emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living
subject stand out more.
Cool
The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast. A
subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive.
COPY
Shoot by Ambience Selection
80
Brighter
The picture will look brighter.
Darker
The picture will look darker.
Monochrome
The picture will be monochrome. You can select the monochrome
color to be black and white, sepia, or blue. When [Monochrome] is
selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder.
COPY
81
In the <2>, <3>, <4>, and <5> Basic Zone modes, you can shoot
while the settings match the lighting or scene type. Normally,
[Default setting] is adequate, but if the settings match the lighting
condition or scene, the picture will look more accurate to your eye.
For Live View shooting, if you set both [Light/scene-based shots] and
[Ambience-based shots] (p.77), you should first set [Light/scene-
based shots]. This will make it easier to see the resulting effect on the
LCD monitor.
1Set the Mode Dial to any of the
following modes: <2>, <3>,
<4> or <5>.
2Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button to display the
Live View image.
XYou can check the resulting effect on
the screen.
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
Lighting or Scene 2 3 4 5
Default setting k k k k
Daylight k k k k
Shade k k k k
Cloudy k k k k
Tungsten light k k k
Fluorescent light k k k
Sunset k k k k
COPY
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
82
3On the Quick Control screen,
select the lighting or scene type.
Press the <Q> button (7).
Press the <V> key to select [
Default setting]. [Light/scene-
based shots] will appear on the
screen.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the desired
lighting or scene type.
XThe resulting image with the selected
lighting or scene type will be
displayed.
4Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
To shoot through the viewfinder, first
press the <A> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
If you change the shooting mode or
set the power switch to <2>, the
setting will revert back to [ Default
setting].
If you use flash, the setting will switch to
[ Default setting].
(However,
the shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that was set.)
If you want to set this together with [
Ambience-based shots
], set the
[
Light/scene-based shots
] that best matches the ambience you have
set. In the case of [
Sunset
] for example, warm colors will become
prominent so the ambience you set may not work well.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1. Then you can set [Light/
scene-based shots] on the Quick Control screen.
COPY
83
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
Lighting or Scene Type Settings
Default setting
Default setting suited for most subjects.
Daylight
For subjects under sunlight. Gives more natural-looking blue skies
and greenery, and reproduces light-colored flowers better.
Shade
For subjects in the shade. Suitable for skin tones, which may look
too bluish, and for light-colored flowers.
Cloudy
For subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and
landscapes, which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day, look
warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.
Tungsten light
For subjects lit under tungsten lighting. Reduces the reddish-orange
color cast caused by tungsten lighting.
Fluorescent light
For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types of
fluorescent lighting.
Sunset
Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.
COPY
84
The easiest way to play back images is explained below. For more
details on the playback procedure, see page 241.
1Play back the image.
Press the <x> button.
XThe last captured image or last image
viewed will appear.
2Select an image.
To view images starting with the last
image, press the <Y> key. To view
images starting with the first (oldest)
image, press the <Z> key.
Each time you press the <B>
button, the display format will change.
3Exit the image playback.
Press the <x> button to exit the
image playback and return to the
shooting settings display.
x Image Playback
No information
Histogram
With basic information
Shooting information display
COPY
85
Creative Shooting
In Basic Zone modes, to prevent spoiled shots,
advanced function settings cannot be changed.
However, in the <d> (Program AE) mode, you can set
various functions and be more creative.
In the <d> mode, the camera sets the shutter speed and
aperture automatically to obtain a standard exposure.
The difference between the Basic Zone modes and <d> is
explained on page 314.
The functions explained in this chapter can also be used in
the <s>, <f>, and <a> modes explained in Chapter
4.
The M mark shown on the right of the page title indicates
that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes
(p.24).
*<d> stands for Program.
*AE stands for Auto Exposure.
COPY
86
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
1Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
2Focus the subject.
Look through the viewfinder and aim
the selected AF point over the
subject. Then press the shutter button
halfway.
XThe dot inside the AF point achieving
focus lights up briefly in red, and the
focus confirmation light <o> on the
viewfinder’s bottom right lights up (in
One-Shot AF mode).
XThe shutter speed and aperture will
be set automatically and displayed in
the viewfinder.
3Check the display.
A standard exposure will be obtained
as long as the shutter speed and
aperture display do not blink.
4Take the picture.
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
d: Program AE
COPY
87
d: Program AE
Change the ISO speed or use the built-in flash.
To match the subject and ambient lighting level, you can change the
ISO speed (p.92) or use the built-in flash (p.107). In the <d> mode,
the built-in flash will not fire automatically. So under low light, press
the <I> (flash) button to raise the built-in flash.
The program can be shifted. (Program shift)
After pressing the shutter button halfway, turn the <6> dial to
change the shutter speed and aperture setting combination
(program). Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture
is taken. Program shift is not possible with flash.
Shooting Tips
If the “30"” shutter speed and the maximum aperture
blink, it indicates underexposure. Increase the ISO
speed or use flash.
If the “4000” shutter speed and the minimum aperture
blink, it indicates overexposure. Decrease the ISO
speed.
Differences Between <d> and <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto)
In the <A> mode, many functions such as the AF operation and metering
mode are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can
change are limited. Whereas in the <d> mode, only the shutter speed and
aperture are set automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering
mode, and other functions (p.314).
COPY
88
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. Ten image-
recording quality settings are provided: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a,
8a, b, c, 1+73, 1.
1Select [Image quality].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
quality], then press <0>.
X[Image quality] will appear.
2Select the image-recording
quality.
The respective quality’s pixel count
and number of possible shots will be
displayed to help you select the
desired quality. Then press <0>.
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Pixels recorded (pixel count)
Possible shots
COPY
89
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
* Figures for the file size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst are based on
Canon’s 8 GB test card and testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100, and Standard
Picture Style). These figures will vary depending on the subject, card brand,
aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible 8 GB card based on Canon’s
testing standards.
Guide to Image-recording Quality Settings (Approx.)
Image Quality
Pixels Recorded
(megapixels)
File Size
(MB)
Possible
Shots
Maximum
Burst
73 High
quality
JPEG
Approx. 17.9
(18M)
6.4 1140 22 (30)
83 3.2 2240 2240 (2240)
74 Medium
quality
Approx. 8.0
(8M)
3.4 2150 410 (2150)
84 1.7 4200 4200 (4200)
7a
Low
quality
Approx. 4.5
(4.5M)
2.2 3350 3350 (3350)
8a1.1 6360 6360 (6360)
bApprox. 2.5
(2.5M) 1.3 5570 5570 (5570)
cApprox. 0.35
(0.35M) 0.3 21560 21560 (21560)
1+73 High
quality
Approx. 17.9
(18M)
23.5+6.4 230 3 (3)
123.5 290 6 (6)
COPY
90
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
I want to select the image-recording quality matching the paper
size for printing.
Refer to the diagram on the left when
choosing the image-recording quality. If
you want to crop the image, selecting a
higher quality (more pixels) such as 73,
83, 1+73, or 1 is recommended.
b is suitable for playing the images on a
digital photo frame. c is suitable for
emailing the image or using it on a Web
site.
What’s the difference between 7 (Fine) and 8 (Normal)?
It indicates a different image quality due to a different compression
rate. Even with the same number of pixels, the 7 image has higher
image quality. If 8 is selected, the image quality will be slightly lower,
but more images can be saved to the card. Both b and c have 7
quality.
I was able to take more shots than the number of possible shots
indicated.
Depending on the shooting conditions, you may be able to take
more shots than was indicated. It may also be fewer than indicated.
The number of possible shots displayed is only approximate.
Does the camera display the maximum burst?
The maximum burst is displayed in the viewfinder’s right side. Since
it is only a single-digit indicator 0 - 9, any number higher than 9 will
be displayed only as “9”. Note that this number will also be displayed
even when no card is installed in the camera. Be careful not to shoot
without a card in the camera.
When should I use 1?
1 images require processing with your computer. For details, see
“About 1” and “About 1+73” on the next page.
FAQ
A4 (29.7x21cm/11.7x8.3in.)
12.7x8.9cm/5.0x3.5in.
A3(42x29.7cm/
16.5x11.7in.)
74
84
A2 (59.4x42cm/23.4x16.5in.)
73
83
1+73
1
7a
8a
b
Paper size
COPY
91
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
1 is the raw image data before it is made into 73 or other images.
Although 1 images require software such as Digital Photo
Professional (provided, p.364) so that they can be displayed on the
computer, they also offer flexibility for image adjustments possible only
with 1. 1 is effective when you want to precisely adjust the image
yourself or shoot an important subject.
1+73 records both a 1 and 73 image with a single shot. The
two images are saved to the card simultaneously. The two images will
be saved in the same folder with the same file numbers (file extension
.JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW). 73 images can be viewed or
printed even with a computer that does not have the software provided
with the camera installed.
About 1
About 1+73
File number File extension
0001 . CR2
1 image
73 image 0001 . JPG
To display 1 images on a computer, using the provided software is
recommended (p.364).
Commercially-available software may not be able to display 1 images
taken with this camera. To see if the 1 images are compatible with
other software, check with the respective software manufacturer.
COPY
92
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the
ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set
automatically (p.93).
1Press the <i> button. (9)
X[ISO speed] will appear.
2Set the ISO speed.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the desired ISO
speed, then press <0>.
You can also set the ISO speed in the
viewfinder while turning the <6>
dial.
With [AUTO] selected, the ISO speed
will be set automatically (p.93).
ISO Speed Guide
* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.
i: Changing the ISO SpeedN
ISO Speed Shooting Situation
(No flash) Flash Range
100 - 400 Sunny outdoors The higher the ISO speed,
the farther the flash range
will extend (p.107).
400 - 1600 Overcast skies or evening time
1600 - 12800, H Dark indoors or night
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1:
On], “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) can also be set (p.298).
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority] is
set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 and “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) cannot be
selected (p.299).
Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.
Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.
COPY
93
i: Changing the ISO SpeedN
If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO], the
actual ISO speed to be set will be
displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway. As indicated on the next
page, the ISO speed will be set
automatically to suit the shooting mode.
ISO [AUTO]
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,
overexposure may result.
With ISO 12800 or “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600), the maximum burst for
continuous shooting will greatly decrease.
As “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) is an expanded ISO speed setting,
noise (such as dots of light and banding) and irregular colors will be more
noticeable, and the resolution will be lower than usual.
As the maximum ISO speed that can be set differs between still photo
shooting and movie shooting (manual exposure), the ISO speed you set
may change when you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting.
Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not
revert to the original setting.
The maximum ISO speed settable varies depending on the setting for [2:
ISO expansion] under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)].
• When [0: Off] is set: If you set ISO 12800 during still photo shooting
and then switch to movie shooting, ISO speed will be changed to ISO
6400.
• When [1: On] is set: If you set ISO 12800 or “H” (equivalent to ISO
25600) during still photo shooting and then switch to movie shooting,
the ISO speed will change to “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800).
COPY
94
i: Changing the ISO SpeedN
*1: Fixed at ISO 400 for bulb exposures.
*2: Depends on the maximum ISO speed limit set.
*3: If fill flash results in overexposure, ISO 100 or a higher ISO speed will be set.
*4: Except in the A, 6, and F modes.
*5: Automatically set within ISO 400 - ISO 1600 (or up to the maximum limit) in the
C, 2, 3, 4, 5 and <d> modes if you use bounce flash with an external
Speedlite.
For ISO Auto, you can set the maximum ISO speed limit within ISO 400
- ISO 6400.
Under the [z3] tab, select [ISO Auto],
then press <0>. Select the ISO speed,
then press <0>.
Shooting Mode ISO Speed Setting
A/7/C/3/4/5/6/GAutomatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400
2ISO 100
FAutomatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 12800
d/s/f/a*1Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400*2
With flash ISO 400*3*4*5
3 Setting the Maximum ISO Speed for [ISO Auto]N
When [AUTO] is set, the ISO speed is indicated in whole-stop
increments. However, the ISO speed is actually set in finer increments.
Therefore, in the image’s shooting information (p.270), you may find an
ISO speed such as 125 or 640 displayed as the ISO speed.
In the <2> mode, the ISO speed shown in the table is actually used
even if ISO 100 is not displayed.
COPY
95
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
matching your photographic expression or the subject.
In Basic Zone modes, you cannot select the Picture Style.
1Press the <XA> button.
X[Picture Style] will appear.
2Select a Picture Style.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the desired
Picture Style, then press <0>.
D Auto
The color tone will be adjusted to suit the scene. The colors will
look vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery, and sunsets in
nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.
P Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
Q Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up
portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (p.133), you can adjust the skin
tone.
A
Optimal Image Characteristics for the Subject
N
Picture Style Characteristics
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture
Style.
COPY
96
A Optimal Image Characteristics for the SubjectN
R Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
S Neutral
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with
their computer. For natural colors and subdued images.
U Faithful
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with
their computer. When the subject is captured under a color
temperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically to
match the subject’s color. Images will appear dull and subdued.
V Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
W User Def. 1-3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.135). Any User
Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the same
default settings as the [Auto] Picture Style.
Black-and-white images shot in formats other than 1 cannot be
reverted to color. If you want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure
the [Monochrome] setting has been canceled. When [Monochrome] is
selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder.
COPY
97
You can select the AF (autofocus) operation characteristics suiting the
shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF
operation is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.
1On the lens, set the focus mode
switch to <AF>.
2Press the <Zf> button.
X[AF operation] will appear.
3Select the AF operation.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the desired AF
operation, then press <0>.
4Focus the subject.
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway. The
camera will then autofocus in the
selected AF operation.
f: Changing the Autofocus OperationN
COPY
98
f: Changing the Autofocus OperationN
Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus only once.
When focus is achieved, the dot inside the AF point achieving focus
lights up briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light <o> in the
viewfinder will also light up.
With evaluative metering (p.117), the exposure setting will be set at
the same time focus is achieved.
While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing
distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button
halfway, the subject will be focused continuously.
The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
When the AF point selection (p.100) is automatic, the camera first
uses the center AF point to focus. During autofocusing, if the subject
moves away from the center AF point, focus tracking continues as
long as the subject is covered by another AF point.
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects
If focus cannot be achieved, the focus confirmation light <o> in the
viewfinder will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the
shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the picture and try to
focus again. Or see “Subjects Difficult to Focus” (p.103).
If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus
is achieved.
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
Also, the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.
COPY
99
f: Changing the Autofocus OperationN
AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI
Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.
After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF operation, if the subject
starts moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF
operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and keep tracking the
moving subject.
AI Focus AF for Automatic Switching of AF Operation
When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,
the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus confirmation
light <o> in the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be
locked in this case.
COPY
100
In Basic Zone modes, the camera will normally focus the closest subject
automatically. Therefore, it may not always focus your target subject.
In the <d>, <s>, <f>, and <a> modes, you can select the AF
point and use it to focus the target subject.
1Press the <S> button. (9)
XThe selected AF point will be
displayed on the LCD monitor and in
the viewfinder.
2Select the AF point.
Use the <S> key to select the AF
point.
While looking at the viewfinder, you
can select the AF point by turning the
<6> dial until the desired AF point
lights up in red.
When all the AF points light up,
automatic AF point selection will be
set. The AF point will be selected
automatically to focus the subject.
Pressing <0> toggles the AF point
selection between the center AF point
and automatic AF point selection.
3Focus the subject.
Aim the selected AF point over the
subject and press the shutter button
halfway to focus.
S Selecting the AF PointN
You can also tap the screen to select AF points. During manual AF point
selection, tapping the [ ] icon at the bottom left of the screen will switch
to automatic AF point selection.
COPY
101
S Selecting the AF PointN
When shooting a portrait up close, use One-Shot AF and focus
the eyes.
If you focus the eyes first, you can then recompose and the face will
remain sharp.
If it is difficult to focus, select and use the center AF point.
The center AF point is the most sensitive among the nine AF points.
To make it easier to focus a moving subject, set the camera to
automatic AF point selection and AI Servo AF (p.98).
The center AF point will first be used to focus the subject. During
autofocusing, if the subject moves away from the center AF point,
focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by
another AF point.
Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway,
the built-in flash fires a brief burst of flashes. It illuminates the subject to
enable easier autofocusing.
Shooting Tips
AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash
The AF-assist beam will not be fired in the following shooting modes:
<7>, <3>, and <5>.
The AF-assist beam cannot be emitted with AI Servo AF operation.
The effective range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is
approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.
In Creative Zone modes, when you raise the built-in flash with the <I>
button (p.107), the AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary. Note
that depending on the setting for [4: AF-assist beam firing] under [54:
Custom Functions (C.Fn)], AF beam will not be emitted (p.300).
COPY
102
S Selecting the AF PointN
With maximum apertures up to f/5.6:
Cross-type focusing (vertical and horizontal lines detected
simultaneously) is possible with all AF points. With certain lenses (see
below), the off-center AF points will detect only vertical or horizontal
lines (no cross-type focusing).
With maximum apertures up to f/2.8:
High-precision AF* with vertical and horizontal lines detection is
possible with the center AF point, in addition to the cross-type focusing
(vertical and horizontal lines detected simultaneously).
The remaining eight AF points enable cross-type focusing in the same
way as when using lenses with maximum apertures up to f/5.6.
* Except with the EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM and EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro.
The following lenses enable only horizontal-line sensitive focusing with
the three AF points on the left and the three AF points on the right and
only vertical-line sensitive focusing with the top and bottom AF points.
Cross-type focusing is possible only with the center AF point.
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 II
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 III
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
AF Operation and Maximum Lens Apertures
Lenses not Enabling Cross-Type Focusing with all AF Points
If you use an Extender (sold separately) and the maximum aperture
becomes smaller than f/5.6, AF shooting will not be possible (except in
[u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], and [FlexiZone - Single] during Live
View shooting). For details, refer to the Extender’s instruction manual.
COPY
103
Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus confirmation light
<o> blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
Very low-contrast subjects
(Example: Blue sky, solid-color walls, etc.)
Subjects in very low light
Extremely backlit or reflective subjects
(Example: Car with a highly reflective body, etc.)
Near and far subjects covered by an AF point
(Example: Animal in a cage, etc.)
Repetitive patterns
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
In such cases, do either of the following:
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as the
subject and lock the focus before recomposing (p.61).
(2) Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.
1Set the lens focus mode switch to
<MF>.
2Focus the subject.
Focus by turning the lens focusing
ring until the subject looks sharp in
the viewfinder.
Subjects Difficult to Focus
MF: Manual Focusing
For subjects difficult to focus during Live View shooting with [u+Tracking],
[FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone - Single], see page 165.
Focusing ring
If you hold down the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF
point achieving focus will light up briefly in red, the beeper will sound, and
the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will light up.
COPY
104
You can shoot up to approx. 5 shots per second. This is effective for
shooting a child running toward you or capturing different facial
expressions.
1Press the <YiQ> button.
2Select <i>.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select <i> continuous
shooting, then press <0>.
3Take the picture.
The camera shoots continuously
while you hold down the shutter
button completely.
Also set the AF operation (p.97) matching the subject.
• For a moving subject
When AI Servo AF is set, focusing will be continuous during
continuous shooting.
• For still subjects
When One-Shot AF is set, the camera will focus only once during
continuous shooting.
Flash can also be used.
Since the flash will require recycling time, the continuous shooting
speed will be slower.
i Continuous Shooting
Shooting Tips
COPY
105
i Continuous Shooting
The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 5 shots per second
is achieved* with a shutter speed of 1/500 sec. or faster and at the
maximum aperture (differs depending on the lens). The continuous
shooting speed may decrease due to shutter speed, aperture, subject
conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, etc.
* With the following lenses, 5 shots per second is achieved with One-
Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off: EF300mm f/4L IS USM,
EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, and
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.
In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become
slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.
When the battery level is low, the continuous shooting speed will become
slightly slower.
COPY
106
1Press the <YiQ> button.
2Select the self-timer.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the self-timer,
then press <0>.
Q:10-sec. self-timer
The remote controller can also be used (p.307).
l:2-sec. self-timer (p.142)
q:10-sec. self-timer plus
continuous shots
Press the <
V
> key to set the
number of multiple shots (2 to 10)
to be taken with the self-timer.
3Take the picture.
Look through the viewfinder, focus the subject,
then press the shutter button completely.
X
You can check the self-timer operation with
the self-timer lamp, beeper, and countdown
display (in seconds) on the LCD monitor.
XTwo seconds before the picture is
taken, the self-timer lamp will light up
and the beeper will sound faster.
j Using the Self-timer
With <q
>, the interval between the multiple shots may be prolonged depending
on the shooting functions settings such as the image-recording quality or flash.
If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter
button, attach the eyepiece cover (p.308). If stray light enters the
viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
The <
l
> enables you to shoot while not touching the camera mounted on a
tripod. This prevents camera shake while you shoot still lifes or long exposures.
After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.84) to check
focus and exposure is recommended.
When using the self-timer to shoot only yourself, use focus lock (p.61) on
an object at about the same distance as where you will stand.
To cancel the self-timer after it starts, press the <YiQ> button.
COPY
107
In indoors, low light, or backlit conditions in daylight, just raise the built-
in flash and press the shutter button to take flash pictures. In the <d>
mode, the shutter speed (1/60 sec. - 1/200 sec.) will be set
automatically to prevent camera shake.
1Press the <D> button.
In Creative Zone modes, you can
press the <D> button anytime to take
flash pictures.
While the flash is recycling, “DbuSY”
is displayed in the viewfinder, and
[BUSYD] is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
2Press the shutter button halfway.
In the bottom left of the viewfinder,
check that the <D> icon is lit.
3Take the picture.
When focus is achieved and you
press the shutter button completely,
the flash will fire for the picture.
Effective Flash Range [Approx. in meters/feet]
D Using the Built-in Flash
ISO Speed
(p.92)
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
Wide Angle Telephoto
100 1 - 3.7 / 3.3 - 12.1 1 - 2.3 / 3.3 - 7.5
200 1 - 5.3 / 3.3 - 17.4 1 - 3.3 / 3.3 - 10.8
400 1 - 7.4 / 3.3 - 24.3 1 - 4.6 / 3.3 - 15.1
800 1 - 10.5 / 3.3 - 34.4 1 - 6.6 / 3.3 - 21.7
1600 1 - 14.9 / 3.3 - 48.9 1 - 9.3 / 3.3 - 30.5
3200 1 - 21.0 / 3.3 - 68.9 1 - 13.1 / 3.3 - 43.0
6400 1 - 29.7 / 3.3 - 97.4 1 - 18.6 / 3.3 - 61.0
12800 1 - 42.0 / 3.3 - 137.8 1 - 26.3 / 3.3 - 86.3
H: 25600 1 - 59.4 / 3.3 - 194.9 1 - 37.1 / 3.3 - 121.7
COPY
108
D Using the Built-in Flash
If the subject is far away, increase the ISO speed (p.92).
By increasing the ISO speed, you can extend the flash range.
In bright light, decrease the ISO speed.
If the exposure setting in the viewfinder blinks, decrease the ISO speed.
Detach the lens hood and do not get too close to the subject.
If the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject,
the bottom of the picture may look dark due to the obstructed flash.
For important shots, check the image on the LCD monitor to make
sure the flash exposure looks natural (not dark at the bottom).
Using the red-eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can
reduce red eye.
Red-eye reduction will function in any shooting mode except <7>,
<3>, <5>, or <G>.
Under the [z1] tab, select [Red-eye
reduc.], then press <0>. Select
[Enable], then press <0>.
For flash photography, when you press
the shutter button halfway, the red-eye
reduction lamp will light up. Then when
you press the shutter button
completely, the picture will be taken.
Shooting Tips
3 Red-eye Reduction
The red-eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at
the red-eye reduction lamp, when the room is well lit, or when you are
close to the subject.
When you press the shutter button halfway, the
scale display on the bottom of the viewfinder will
shrink and turn off. For best results, take the picture
after this scale display turns off.
The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the subject.
COPY
109
Advanced Shooting
This chapter builds on Chapter 3 and introduces more
ways to shoot creatively.
The first half of this chapter explains how to use the <s>,
<f>, and <a> modes on the Mode Dial.
All the functions explained in Chapter 3 can also be used in
the <s>, <f>, and <a> modes.
To see which functions can be used in each shooting mode,
see page 314.
The M mark shown on the right of the page title indicates
that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes
(p.24).
The pointer icon <c> displayed
together with the shutter speed, aperture
setting, or exposure compensation
amount indicates that you can turn the
<6> dial to adjust the respective
setting.
c About the Main Dial Pointer
COPY
110
You can either freeze the action or create motion blur with the <s>
(Shutter-priority AE) mode on the Mode Dial.
* <s> stands for Time value.
1Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
2Set the desired shutter speed.
See “Shooting Tips” for advice on
setting the shutter speed.
Turning the <6> dial to the right
sets a faster shutter speed, and
turning it to the left sets a slower one.
3Take the picture.
When you focus and press the
shutter button completely, the picture
will be taken at the selected shutter
speed.
s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement
Blurred motion
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)
Frozen action
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)
Shutter Speed Display
The LCD monitor displays the shutter speed as a fraction. However, the
viewfinder displays only the denominator. Also, “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and
“15"” is 15 sec.
COPY
111
s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement
To freeze the motion of a fast-moving subject
Use a fast shutter speed such as 1/4000 sec. to 1/500 sec.
To blur a running child or animal and convey an impression of
motion
Use a medium shutter speed such as 1/250 sec. to 1/30 sec. Follow
the moving subject through the viewfinder and press the shutter
button to take the picture. If you use a telephoto lens, hold it steady
to prevent camera shake.
To blur a flowing river or fountain
Use a slow shutter speed of 1/30 sec. or slower. Use a tripod to
prevent hand-held camera shake.
Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not blink.
If you press the shutter button halfway and change
the shutter speed while the aperture is displayed,
the aperture display will also change to maintain the
same exposure (amount of light reaching the image
sensor). If you exceed the adjustable aperture
range, the aperture display will blink to indicate that
the standard exposure cannot be obtained.
If the exposure will be too dark, the maximum aperture (smallest
number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to
set a slower shutter speed or increase the ISO speed.
If the exposure will be too bright, the minimum aperture (highest
number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the right to
set a faster shutter speed or decrease the ISO speed.
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set
automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the automatically-set
aperture. The shutter speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec.
Shooting Tips
D Using the Built-in Flash
COPY
112
To blur the background or to make everything near and far look sharp,
set the Mode Dial to <f> (Aperture-priority AE) to adjust the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
*
<
f
> stands for Aperture value, which is the size of the diaphragm hole inside the lens.
1Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
2Set the desired aperture.
The higher the f/number, the wider
the depth of field where sharper focus
is obtained in both the foreground
and background.
Turning the <6> dial to the right will
set a higher f/number (smaller
aperture opening), and turning it to
the left will set a lower f/number
(larger aperture opening).
3Take the picture.
Focus and press the shutter button
completely. The picture will be taken
with the selected aperture.
f: Changing the Depth of Field
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
Aperture Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
apertures displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.
COPY
113
f: Changing the Depth of Field
When using an aperture with a high f/number or shooting in low
light scenes, note that camera shake can occur.
A higher aperture f/number will make the shutter speed slower.
Under low light, the shutter speed can be as long as 30 sec. In such
cases, increase the ISO speed and hold the camera steady or use a
tripod.
The depth of field depends not only on the aperture, but also on
the lens and on the subject distance.
Since wide-angle lenses have a wide depth of field (range of
acceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focus), you need
not set a high aperture f/number to obtain a sharp picture from the
foreground to the background. On the other hand, a telephoto lens
has a narrow depth of field.
The closer the subject, the narrower the depth of field. A farther
subject will have a wider depth of field.
Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does not
blink.
If you press the shutter button halfway and change
the aperture while the shutter speed is displayed,
the shutter speed display will also change to
maintain the same exposure (amount of light
reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the
adjustable shutter speed range, the shutter speed
display will blink to indicate that the standard
exposure cannot be obtained.
If the picture will be too dark, the “30"” (30 sec.) shutter speed
display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to set
a lower aperture f/number or increase the ISO speed.
If the picture will be too bright, the “4000” (1/4000 sec.) shutter
speed display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the
right to set a higher aperture f/number or decrease the ISO speed.
Shooting Tips
COPY
114
f: Changing the Depth of Field
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set
automatically to match the set aperture (autoflash exposure). The
shutter speed will be set automatically between 1/200 sec. - 30 sec. to
suit the scene’s brightness.
In low light, the main subject is exposed with the automatic flash, and
the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically.
Both the subject and background look properly exposed (automatic
slow-speed flash sync). If you are handholding the camera, keep it
steady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
To prevent a slow shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control], set
[Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/200-1/60 sec. auto] or [1/200
sec. (fixed)] (p.219).
The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when
the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.
Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.
Press the depth-of-field preview button
to stop down the lens to the current
aperture setting and check the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
D Using the Built-in Flash
Depth of Field PreviewN
While looking at the Live View image (p.146) and holding down the depth-of-
field preview button, you can change the aperture and see how the depth of
field changes.
COPY
115
You can set both the shutter speed and aperture manually as desired.
While referring to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder, you can
set the exposure as desired. This method is called manual exposure.
* <a> stands for Manual.
1Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
2Set the ISO speed (p.92).
3
Set the shutter speed and aperture.
To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial.
To set the aperture, hold down the
<
O
> button and turn the <
6
> dial.
4Focus the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
XThe exposure setting will be
displayed in the viewfinder.
The exposure level mark <h>
indicates how far the current
exposure level is from the standard
exposure level.
5Set the exposure and take the picture.
Check the exposure level and set the desired shutter speed and
aperture.
If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±2 stops from
the standard exposure, the end of the exposure level indicator
will display <I> or <J> in the viewfinder. (On the LCD monitor, if
the exposure level exceeds ±3 stops, <I> or <J> will be
displayed.)
a: Manual Exposure
<6>
<O> + <6>
Exposure level mark
Standard exposure index
If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter speed
and aperture to obtain a standard exposure. Therefore, you may not obtain
the desired exposure effect.
COPY
116
a: Manual Exposure
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set
automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the manually-set aperture.
The shutter speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec. or <BULB>.
A bulb exposure keeps the shutter open
for as long as you hold down the shutter
button. It can be used to photograph
fireworks and other subjects requiring
long exposures.
In step 3 on the preceding page, turn the
<6> dial to the left to set <BULB>.
The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the LCD monitor.
I Using the Built-in Flash
BULB: Bulb Exposures
In [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark <X> for [Disable
during man expo] is removed, it can be set in the <a> mode (p.125).
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <
A
> button to lock the ISO speed.
After recomposing the picture, you can see the exposure level difference
on the exposure level indicator (p.22, 23) compared to when you pressed
the <A> button.
During the bulb exposure, do not point the lens toward the sun. The
sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.
Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image may
look a little grainy.
When [z3: Long exp. noise reduction] is set to [Auto] or [Enable],
noise generated by the long exposure can be reduced (p.127).
If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed will be ISO 400 (p.94).
For bulb exposures, using a tripod and Remote Switch (sold separately,
p.308) is recommended.
You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.307) for bulb
exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button, the
bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button
again to stop the bulb exposure.
COPY
117
Four methods (metering modes) to measure the subject’s brightness
are provided. Normally, evaluative metering is recommended.
In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically.
1Select [Metering mode].
Under the [z2] tab, select [Metering
mode], then press <0>.
2Set the metering mode.
Select the metering mode, then press
<0>.
q Evaluative metering
This is a general-purpose metering mode suited
even for backlit subjects. The camera sets the
exposure automatically to suit the scene.
w Partial metering
Effective when the background is much brighter
than the subject due to backlighting, etc. The
gray area in the left figure is where the
brightness is metered to obtain the standard
exposure.
r Spot metering
This is for metering a specific part of the subject
or scene. The gray area in the left figure is
where the brightness is metered to obtain the
standard exposure. This metering mode is for
advanced users.
q Changing the Metering ModeN
COPY
118
q Changing the Metering ModeN
e Center-weighted average metering
The brightness is metered at the image center
and then averaged for the entire scene. This
metering mode is for advanced users.
With q (evaluative metering) and e (center-weighted average
metering), the metering range is almost the same as with viewfinder
shooting.
With w (partial metering) and r (spot metering), the metering
range slightly differs from viewfinder shooting. The approximate
metering ranges are as shown below:
* The figures show when [Grid 2 m] is set. The metering ranges are not
displayed on the LCD monitor.
Metering Range During Live View Shooting
Partial metering Spot metering
With q (evaluative metering) during viewfinder shooting, the exposure
setting will be locked when you press the shutter button halfway and focus is
achieved. With w (partial metering), r (spot metering), and e (center-
weighted average metering), exposure setting is set at the moment of
exposure. (The exposure setting is not locked when you press the shutter
button halfway.) During Live View shooting, the exposure setting is set at the
moment of exposure, regardless of the metering mode setting.
COPY
119
Set exposure compensation if the exposure (without flash) does not come out
as desired. This feature can be used in Creative Zone modes (except <
a
>).
You can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
Making it brighter:
Hold down the <O> button and
turn the <6> dial to the right.
(Increased exposure)
Making it darker:
Hold down the <O> button and
turn the <6> dial to the left.
(Decreased exposure)
XAs shown in the figure, the exposure
level is displayed on the LCD monitor
and in the viewfinder.
After taking the picture, cancel the
exposure compensation by setting
it back to 0.
Setting Exposure CompensationN
O Setting Exposure Compensation
Increased exposure for a brighter image
Decreased exposure for a darker image
The exposure compensation amount displayed in the viewfinder goes up
to only ±2 stops. If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±2
stops, the end of the exposure level indicator will display <I> or <J>.
If you want to set exposure compensation exceeding ±2 stops, setting it
with [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] (p.121) or with the Quick Control screen
(p.44) is recommended.
Dark exposure Increased exposure for a brighter image
COPY
120
Setting Exposure CompensationN
Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject
does not come out as desired. You can set the exposure compensation
up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
1Press the <Q> button. (7)
XThe Quick Control screen will appear
(p.44).
2Select [y].
Press the <S> key to select [y*].
X[Flash exposure comp.] will be
displayed at the bottom.
3
Set the exposure compensation amount.
To make the flash exposure brighter,
turn the <6> dial to the right
(increased exposure). To make it
darker, turn the <6> dial to the left
(decreased exposure).
XWhen you press the shutter button
halfway, the <y> icon will appear in
the viewfinder.
After taking the picture, cancel the
flash exposure compensation by
setting it back to 0.
y Flash Exposure Compensation
If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.125) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation is set.
You can also set flash exposure compensation with [Built-in flash settings]
in [z1: Flash control] (p.220).
COPY
121
This feature takes exposure compensation a step further by varying the
exposure automatically (up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments) with
three shots as shown below. You can then choose the best exposure.
This is called AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing).
1Select [Expo.comp./AEB].
Under the [z2] tab, select
[Expo.comp./AEB
], then press <
0
>.
2Set the AEB range.
Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB
range.
Press the <U> key to set the
exposure compensation amount. If
AEB is combined with exposure
compensation, AEB will be applied
centering on the exposure
compensation amount.
Press <0> to set it.
When you press the <M> button
to exit the menu, the AEB range will
be displayed on the LCD monitor.
3Take the picture.
Focus and press the shutter button
completely. The three bracketed
shots will be taken in this sequence:
standard exposure, decreased
exposure, and increased exposure.
3 Auto Exposure BracketingN
Standard exposure Darker exposure
(Decreased exposure)
Brighter exposure
(Increased exposure)
AEB range
COPY
122
3 Auto Exposure BracketingN
Follow steps 1 and 2 to turn off the AEB level display.
The AEB setting will also be canceled automatically if the power
switch is set to <2>, flash recycling is completed, etc.
Using AEB with continuous shooting
If <i> continuous shooting (p.104) is set and you press the shutter
button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken
continuously in this sequence: standard exposure, decreased
exposure, and increased exposure.
Using AEB with <u> single shooting
Press the shutter button three times to take the three bracketed
shots. The three bracketed shots will be exposed in the following
sequence: standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased
exposure.
Using AEB with the self-timer or a remote controller (sold
separately)
With the self-timer or a remote control shooting (<Q> or <l>),
you can take three continuous shots after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.
With <q> (p.106) set, the number of continuous shots will be three
times the number set.
Canceling AEB
Shooting Tips
AEB cannot be used with flash, Multi Shot Noise Reduction, Creative
filters, or bulb exposures.
If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.125) is set to any setting other
than [Disable], the AEB’s effect may be minimal.
COPY
123
You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from the
exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same
exposure setting. Press the <
A
> button to lock the exposure, then recompose
and take the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective for backlit subjects.
1Focus the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
XThe exposure setting will be
displayed.
2Press the <A> button. (0)
XThe <A> icon lights up in the
viewfinder to indicate that the
exposure setting is locked (AE lock).
Each time you press the <A> button,
the current autoexposure setting is
locked.
3Recompose and take the picture.
If you want to maintain the AE lock
while taking more shots, hold down
the <A> button and press the shutter
button to take another shot.
* When the lens’ focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied at the
center AF point.
A Locking the ExposureN
AE Lock Effects
Metering Mode
(p.117)
AF Point Selection Method (p.100)
Automatic Selection Manual Selection
q*AE lock is applied at the AF
point that achieved focus.
AE lock is applied at the
selected AF point.
wre AE lock is applied at the center AF point.
COPY
124
If the subject is on the side of the frame and you use flash, the subject may
turn out to be too bright or dark depending on the background, etc. This is
when you should use FE lock. After setting the proper flash exposure for
the subject, you can recompose (put the subject toward the side) and
shoot. This feature can also be used with a Canon EX-series Speedlite.
* FE stands for Flash Exposure.
1Press the <D> button.
XThe built-in flash will rise.
Press the shutter button halfway and
look in the viewfinder to check that
the <D> icon is lit.
2Focus the subject.
3Press the <A> button. (8)
Aim the spot metering circle over the
subject, then press the <A> button.
XThe flash will fire a preflash and the
required flash output is calculated
and retained in memory.
XIn the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed
for a moment and <d> will light up.
Each time you press the <
A
> button, a
preflash is fired and the required flash output
is calculated and retained in memory.
4Take the picture.
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
XThe flash is fired when the picture is
taken.
A Locking the Flash ExposureN
Spot metering circle
If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash,
the <D> icon will blink. Get closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4.
FE lock cannot be used during Live View shooting.
COPY
125
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto
Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG
images, the correction is done when the image is captured.
In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.
1Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
Under the [z2] tab, select [Auto
Lighting Optimizer], then press
<0>.
2Select the setting.
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
3Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected if
necessary.
3
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
N
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority] is
set to [1: Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to
[Disable] and the setting cannot be changed.
If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,
the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set
this function to [Disable].
Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.
In step 2, if you press the <B> button and uncheck <X> the [Disable
during man expo] setting, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set in the
<a> mode.
COPY
126
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise
reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high
ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the
image (shadow areas) is further reduced. Change the setting to suit the
noise level.
1Select [High ISO speed NR].
Under the [z3] tab, select [High ISO
speed NR], then press <0>.
2Set the setting.
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
XThe setting screen closes and the
menu will reappear.
[M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction]
Noise reduction with higher image quality than when [High] is
applied. For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and
aligned and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
3Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
3 Noise Reduction SettingsN
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
With [High] or [Multi Shot Noise Reduction], the maximum burst for
continuous shooting will greatly decrease.
COPY
127
3 Noise Reduction SettingsN
You can reduce noise in long exposures.
1Select [Long exp. noise
reduction].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Long
exp. noise reduction], then press
<0>.
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
About [Multi Shot Noise Reduction]
The following functions cannot be set: AEB, WB bracketing, [z3: Long
exp. noise reduction], 1+73/1. If any of these has already been
set, [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] cannot be set.
Flash shooting is not possible. The AF-assist beam will be emitted according to
the [
54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)
]’s [
4: AF-assist beam firing
] setting.
You cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] for bulb exposures.
If you turn off the power or change the shooting mode to a Basic Zone
mode, movie shooting, or bulb, the setting will change to [Standard].
If the images are greatly misaligned due to camera shake or if there is a
moving subject, the noise reduction effect may be minimal.
If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal
shooting. During the processing of the images, “BUSY” will be displayed
and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.
[z3: Dust Delete Data] cannot be set.
If [
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
]
is set, direct printing (p.280) is not
possible.
If you play back a 1+73 or 1 image with the camera or print an image
directly, the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look minimal.
Check the noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced images with Digital
Photo Professional (provided software, p.364).
COPY
128
3 Noise Reduction SettingsN
2Set the setting.
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
XThe setting screen closes and the
menu will reappear.
[Auto]
For 1 sec. or longer exposures, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This
[Auto] setting is effective in most cases.
[Enable]
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting may be able to reduce noise that otherwise
cannot be detected with the [Auto] setting.
3Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
With [Auto] and [Enable], the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as the exposure. You cannot
take another picture until the noise reduction process is completed.
Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]
setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.
With [Auto] and [Enable], if a long exposure is shot with the Live View
image displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction
process. The Live View display will not reappear until the noise reduction
is completed. (You cannot take another picture.)
COPY
129
Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners
look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject
outlines is another chromatic aberration. Both lens aberrations can be
corrected. 1 images can be corrected with Digital Photo Professional
(provided software, p.364).
1Select [Lens aberration
correction].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens
aberration correction], then press
<0>.
2Select the setting.
Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
Select [Peripheral illumin.], then
press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
If [Correction data not available] is
displayed, see “About the Lens
Correction Data” on page 131.
3Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with the
peripheral illumination corrected.
3
Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction
Peripheral Illumination Correction
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image
periphery.
The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum
correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (provided
software).
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
COPY
130
3 Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction
1Select the setting.
Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
Select [Chromatic aberration], then
press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
If [Correction data not available] is
displayed, see “About the Lens
Correction Data” on the next page.
2Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with the
chromatic aberration corrected.
Chromatic Aberration Correction
With [Enable], the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly
decrease.
If you play back a 1 image shot with the chromatic aberration
corrected, the image will be displayed on the camera without the
chromatic aberration correction applied. Check the chromatic aberration
correction with Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.364).
COPY
131
3 Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction
The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction
data and chromatic aberration correction data for approx. 25 lenses. If
you select [Enable], the peripheral illumination correction and
chromatic aberration correction will be applied automatically for any
lens whose correction data is registered in the camera.
With EOS Utility (provided software), you can check which lenses have
their correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the
correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the
Software Instruction Manual (CD-ROM) for EOS Utility (p.367).
Notes for Peripheral Illumination Correction and Chromatic Aberration
Correction
About the Lens Correction Data
Peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction
cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.
When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
If you use the magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral
illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will not be
reflected in the image shown on the screen.
If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image and check
it.
Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size
Converter is attached.
If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to
[Disable].
If the lens does not have distance information, the correction amount will
be lower.
COPY
132
You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters
such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. To see the resulting effects, take
test shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 134.
1Press the <XA> button.
2Select a Picture Style.
Select a Picture Style, then press the
<B> button.
XThe Detail setting screen will appear.
3Select a parameter.
Select a parameter such as
[Sharpness], then press <0>.
4Set the parameter.
Press the <U> key to adjust the
parameter as desired, then press
<0>.
Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted parameters. The Picture
Style selection screen will reappear.
XAny parameter settings different from
the default will be displayed in blue.
A Customizing Image CharacteristicsN
By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the respective
Picture Style to its default parameter settings.
To shoot with the Picture Style you modified, follow step 2 on page 95 to
select the modified Picture Style and then shoot.
COPY
133
A Customizing Image CharacteristicsN
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of the image.
To make it less sharp, set it toward the E end. The closer it is to E,
the softer the image will look.
To make it sharper, set it toward the F end. The closer it is to F, the
sharper the image will look.
Contrast
Adjusts the image contrast and the vividness of colors.
To decrease the contrast, set it toward the minus end. The closer it is
to G, the more muted the image will look.
To increase the contrast, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to
H, the crisper the image will look.
Saturation
The image’s color saturation can be adjusted.
To decrease the color saturation, set it toward the minus end. The
closer it is to G, the more diluted the colors will look.
To increase the color saturation, set it toward the plus end. The
closer it is to H, the bolder the colors will look.
Color tone
The skin tones can be adjusted.
To make the skin tone redder, set it toward the minus end. The
closer it is to G, the redder the skin tone will look.
To make the skin tone less red, set it toward the plus end. The closer
it is to H, the more yellow the skin tone will look.
Parameter Settings and Effects
COPY
134
A Customizing Image CharacteristicsN
For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] in
addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast] explained on the preceding
page.
kFilter Effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.
lToning Effect
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in that
color. It can make the image look more
impressive.
The following can be selected: [N:None],
[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or
[G:Green].
V Monochrome Adjustment
Filter Sample Effects
N: None Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye : Yell o w The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R: Red The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G: Green Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
COPY
135
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].
You can create multiple Picture Styles whose parameter settings such
as sharpness and contrast are different.
You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that has been
registered to the camera with EOS Utility (provided software, p.364).
1Press the <XA> button.
2Select [User Def.*].
Select a [User Def.*] style, then press
<B>.
XThe Detail setting screen will appear.
3Press <0>.
With [Picture Style] selected, press
<0>.
4Select the base Picture Style.
Press the <S> key or turn the <6>
dial to select the base Picture Style,
then press <0>.
To adjust the parameters of a Picture
Style that has been registered to the
camera with EOS Utility (provided
software), select the Picture Style
here.
A
Registering Preferred Image Characteristics
N
COPY
136
A Registering Preferred Image CharacteristicsN
5Select a parameter.
Select a parameter such as
[Sharpness], then press <0>.
6Set the parameter.
Press the <U> key to adjust the
parameter as desired, then press
<0>. For details, see “Customizing
Image Characteristics” on pages 132-
134.
Press the <M> button to register
the modified Picture Style. The
Picture Style selection screen will
then reappear.
XThe base Picture Style will be
indicated on the right of [User Def.*].
If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def.*],
changing the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter
settings of the registered Picture Style.
If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.214), all the [User Def.*]
settings will revert to their defaults. Picture Styles registered via EOS
Utility (provided software) will have only their modified parameters
reverted to their default settings.
To shoot with a registered Picture Style, follow step 2 on page 95 to
select [User Def.*], then shoot.
For the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera, refer to
the EOS Utility Instructions (p.367).
COPY
137
The function adjusting the color tone so that white objects look white in
the picture is called white balance (WB). Normally, the <Q> (Auto)
setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors
cannot be obtained with <Q>, you can select the white balance that
matches the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.
1Press the <WB> button.
X[White balance] will appear.
2Select the white balance.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the desired white
balance, then press <0>.
The “Approx. ****K” (K: Kelvin)
displayed for the white balance
settings <W>, <E>, <R>, <Y>
or <U> is the respective color
temperature.
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance
for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure
under the actual light source to be used.
1Photograph a white object.
The plain, white object should fill the
spot metering circle.
Focus manually and set the standard
exposure for the white object.
You can set any white balance.
B: Matching the Light SourceN
O Custom White Balance
Spot metering circle
COPY
138
B: Matching the Light SourceN
2Select [Custom White Balance].
Under the [z2] tab, select [Custom
White Balance], then press <0>.
XThe custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
3Import the white balance data.
Select the image that was captured in
step 1, then press <0>.
XOn the dialog screen that appears,
select [OK] and the data will be
imported.
When the menu reappears, press the
<M> button to exit the menu.
4Select the custom white balance.
Press the <
WB
> button.
Select <O>, then press <0>.
If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard
exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
An image captured while the Picture Style was set to [Monochrome]
(p.96) or an image processed with a Creative filter cannot be selected in
step 3.
Instead of a white object, an 18% gray card (commercially available) can
produce a more accurate white balance.
The personal white balance registered with EOS Utility (provided
software, p.364) will be registered under <O>. If you perform step 3,
the data for the registered personal white balance will be erased.
COPY
139
You can correct the white balance that has been set. This adjustment
will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color
temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color
can be corrected to one of nine levels.
This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color
temperature conversion or color compensating filters.
1Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].
Under the [z2] tab, select [WB
Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.
XThe WB correction/WB bracketing
screen will appear.
2Set the white balance correction.
Press the <S> key to move the “ ”
mark to the desired position.
B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The color
in the respective direction will be
corrected.
On the upper right, “SHIFT” indicates
the direction and correction amount.
Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
u
Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source
N
White Balance Correction
Sample setting: A2, G1
When the white balance is corrected, <u> will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating
the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)
COPY
140
u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceN
With just one shot, three images having a different color balance can be
recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white
balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias or
magenta/green bias. This is called white balance bracketing (WB-BKT). White
balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in single-level increments.
Set the white balance bracketing amount.
In step 2 for white balance correction,
when you turn the <6> dial, the “ ”
mark on the screen will change to
“ ” (3 points).
Turning the dial to the
right sets the B/A bracketing, and turning
it to the left sets the M/G bracketing.
XOn the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction
amount.
Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
Bracketing Sequence
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
White Balance Auto Bracketing
B/A bias ±3 levels
During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
be lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to approx.
one-third the normal number.
You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record
the shot to the card.
“Bkt.” stands for bracketing.
COPY
141
The range of reproducible colors is called the color space. With this
camera, the color space for captured images can be set to sRGB or
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
In Basic Zone modes, sRGB is set automatically.
1Select [Color space].
Under the [z2] tab, select [Color
space], then press <0>.
2Set the desired color space.
Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then
press <0>.
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you do not know
about image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a
sRGB personal computer environment and with printers not compatible
with Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Post-
processing of the image with software will therefore be required.
3
Setting the Color Reproduction Range
N
About Adobe RGB
If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the
first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.
The ICC profile is not appended. Refer to explanations about the ICC
profile in the Software Instruction Manual (p.367) on the CD-ROM.
COPY
142
The camera’s mechanical shake caused by the reflex mirror action can
blur images taken with a super telephoto lens or close-up (macro) lens.
In such cases, mirror lockup is effective.
Mirror lockup is enabled by setting [5: Mirror lockup] to [1: Enable]
in the [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)] (p.300).
1Focus the subject, then press the shutter button
completely.
XThe mirror will swing up.
2Press the shutter button completely again.
XThe picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.
After taking the picture, set [5: Mirror lockup] to [0: Disable].
Using the self-timer <Q>, <l> with mirror lockup
When you press the shutter button completely, the mirror locks up,
then the picture is taken 10 sec. or 2 sec. later.
Remote control shooting
Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken, remote
control shooting together with mirror lockup can further prevent
camera shake (p.307). With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold
separately) set to a 2-sec. delay, press the transmit button and the
mirror will lockup before the picture is taken 2 sec. later.
Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Shake
N
Shooting Tips
COPY
143
Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera ShakeN
In very bright light such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,
take the picture promptly after mirror lockup.
Do not point the camera toward the sun. The sun’s heat can damage the
camera’s internal components.
If you use the self-timer and bulb exposure in combination with a mirror
lockup, keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer delay
time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button during the
self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound, but no
picture will be taken.
Even if <i> or <q> is set for drive mode, single shooting will take
effect.
When [z3: High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction], four continuous shots will be taken for the single picture
regardless of the [5: Mirror lockup] setting.
If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back down
automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the
mirror again.
COPY
COPY
145
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera’s
LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.
If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the
LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.
Using a tripod is recommended.
About Remote Live View Shooting
With EOS Utility (provided software, p.364) installed in your
computer, you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot
remotely while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to
the Software Instruction Manual (p.367) on the CD-ROM.
COPY
146
1Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button.
XThe Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor. In the <A> mode,
the scene icon for the scene detected
by the camera is displayed on the
upper left (p.149).
By default, Continuous AF (p.156) will
take effect.
The Live View image will closely
reflect the brightness level of the
actual image you capture.
2Focus the subject.
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method (p.159).
3Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely.
X
The picture will be taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.
XAfter the image review ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
Press the <A> button to exit Live
View shooting.
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
The image’s field of view is approx. 99% (when the image-recording
quality is set to JPEG 73).
In Creative Zone modes, you can check the depth of field by pressing the
depth-of-field preview button.
During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also
be applied to subsequent shots.
You can also tap the subject on the LCD monitor to focus (p.159-167)
and shoot (p.168).
You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.307) for Live View shooting.
COPY
147
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Set [A: Live View shoot.] to [Enable].
Battery Life with Live View Shooting [Approx. number of shots]
The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8 and CIPA
(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, continuous Live View shooting is
possible as for approx. 1 hr. 30 min. at 23°C / 73°F.
Enabling Live View Shooting
Temperature Shooting Conditions
No Flash 50% Flash Use
At 23°C / 73°F 200 180
At 0°C / 32°F 170 150
In the <F> and <G> shooting modes, the picture area will be smaller
than with other shooting modes.
During Live View shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The
sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.
Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 171-172.
When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot
will be taken. Also, the time it takes to take the picture after you press the
shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder
shooting.
If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn
off automatically as set with [52: Auto power off] (p.205). If [52: Auto
power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end automatically
after approx. 30 min. (camera power remains on).
With the stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) or HDMI cable
HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the Live View image on a TV
(p.262, 265).
COPY
148
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
Information Display
ISO speed
Exposure level indicator/AEB range
Aperture
Shutter speed
Picture Style
Battery check
Exposure
simulation
Image-recording
quality
White balance
AF point (Quick AF)
Histogram
Drive mode
AE lock
D Flash-ready
b Flash off
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
AF method
Possible shots
Eye-Fi card
transmission
status
Shooting mode
Touch shutter
GPS connection indicator
Switch to auto
selection (AF point)
Digital compass
AEB/FEB/
Multi Shot Noise
Reduction
Magnified view
Quick Control
Metering mode
Built-in flash
settings
Highlight tone priority
Creative filters
Flash exposure compensation
When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image
brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.
If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at
a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low-
or bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect
the exposure setting. Note that noise may be more noticeable than the
actual image recorded.
If you use the
<F>
or
<G>
shooting mode, bulb exposure, or flash, the
<g>
icon and histogram will be grayed out (for your reference). The
histogram may not be properly displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.
COPY
149
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
During Live View shooting in the <A> mode, an icon representing the
scene detected by the camera will be displayed and the shooting will be
adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the
icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF method is
set, the “Non-Portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension Tube
or Closeup Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply: The shooting scene is dark, it is a
night scene, and the camera is mounted on a tripod.
<→ Continued on next page>
Scene Icons
Subject Portrait*1 Non-Portrait
Background
Color
Background
Movement
Nature and
Outdoor Scene
Movement
Close*2
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue sky
included Light blue
Backlit
Sunset *3 *3 Orange
Spotlight
Dark blueDark
With tripod *4*5 *3 *4*5 *3
COPY
150
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II • EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM • EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses marketed in 2012 or later.
*4*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 apply, the shutter speed will become slow.
The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style, white
balance, etc., in the Live View image so you can see how the captured
image will look like.
During shooting, the Live View image will automatically reflect the
function settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting
Picture Style
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will
be reflected.
White balance
White balance correction
Ambience-based shots
Light/scene-based shots
Creative filters
Metering mode
Exposure
Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Highlight tone priority
Aspect ratio (image area confirmation)
Final Image Simulation
COPY
151
Function settings particular to Live View shooting are explained here.
If you press the <Q> button while the image is displayed on the LCD
monitor in a Creative Zone mode, you can set any of the following: AF
method, drive mode, metering mode, image-recording quality, built-
in flash settings, white balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer,
and Creative filters.
In Basic Zone modes, you can set the functions in bold and the settings
shown in the table on page 76.
1Press the <Q> button.
XThe settable functions will be
displayed.
2Select a function and set it.
Press the <V> key to select a
function.
XThe selected function and Feature
guide (p.52) will appear.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to change the setting.
To set the drive mode’s <q> setting
or Picture Style parameters, press the
<B> button.
3Exit the setting.
Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to Live View shooting.
You can also select <2> to return to
Live View shooting.
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
In Creative Zone modes, you can set the ISO speed by pressing the
<i> button.
For details on metering modes, see page 117.
COPY
152
While looking at the Live View screen, you can shoot while applying a
filter effect (Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect). These
are called Creative filters.
When you shoot with a Creative filter applied, only images applied with
a Creative filter will be saved. If you also want to save the image without
a Creative filter, shoot the image without the Creative filter and apply
the Creative filter afterward, then save it as a separate image (p.274).
1Set any shooting mode except
<F> or <G>.
2Press the <Q> button.
XThe Quick Control screen will appear.
3Select [ ].
Press the <V> key to select [ ]
(Creative filter) on the screen’s right
side.
4Select the Creative filter effect.
Press the <U> key to select a
Creative filter (p.154).
XThe Creative filter’s effect will appear
on the screen.
U Using Creative Filters
COPY
153
U Using Creative Filters
5Adjust the Creative filter’s effect.
Press the <B> button (except for
the Miniature effect).
Press the <U> key to adjust the
Creative filter’s effect, then press
<0>.
For the Miniature effect, press <0>,
then press the <V> key to move the
white frame to where you want it to
look sharp.
6Take the picture.
XThe picture will be applied with the
Creative filter.
Even if you set the drive mode to <i> or the self-timer to <q>, single
shooting will take effect.
Creative filters cannot be used if any of the following is set: 1+JPEG
or 1 image quality, AEB, white balance bracketing, or multi shot noise
reduction.
When you shoot with a Creative filter, the histogram will not be displayed.
COPY
154
U Using Creative Filters
Grainy B/W
Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the
contrast, you can change the black-and-white effect.
Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change
the degree of softness.
Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the amount trimmed along
the image periphery will change. Also, since this filter effect
magnifies the image center, the apparent resolution at the center
may degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. Set the
filter effect while checking the resulting image. The AF method will
either be FlexiZone - Single (fixed at center) or Quick mode.
Art bold effect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look three-
dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note that
the sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendered with a
smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.
Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can adjust the color density. Note that night scenes or dark scenes
may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular
or have significant noise.
Creative Filter Characteristics
COPY
155
U Using Creative Filters
Toy camera effect
Gives a color cast typical of toy cameras and darkens the image’s
four corners. By adjusting the color tone, you can change the color
cast.
Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image is to
look sharp. In step 5, you can press the <u> button (or tap [ ] on
the screen) to change the white frame’s orientation (horizontal/
vertical) where you want the image to look sharp. The AF method
will be FlexiZone - Single with the camera focusing the center of the
white frame.
With Grainy B/W, the grainy effect displayed on the LCD monitor will not
look the same as the actual photo.
With the Soft focus or Miniature effect, the blur effect displayed on the
LCD monitor may not look the same as the actual photo. You can check
the blur effect for the actual photo by pressing the depth-of-field preview
button (only in Creative Zone modes).
COPY
156
The menu options below are displayed.
The functions settable on this menu
screen only apply during Live View
shooting. These functions do not take
effect during viewfinder shooting.
Live View shooting
You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].
AF method
You can select [u+Tracking] (p.159), [FlexiZone - Multi] (p.161),
[FlexiZone - Single] (p.162), or [Quick mode] (p.166).
Continuous AF
The default setting is [Enable].
Since the focus is constantly close to the subject, when you press
the shutter button, the camera quickly focuses the subject. If
[Enable] is set, the lens will operate frequently and consume more
battery power. This will reduce the number of possible shots (battery
life). Also, if the AF method is set to [Quick mode], Continuous AF
will be automatically set to [Disable]. If you select another AF
method, Continuous AF will revert to the original setting.
During Continuous AF, turn off the power before you set the lens’s
focus mode switch to <MF>.
Touch Shutter
Just by tapping the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the
picture automatically. For details, see page 168.
Grid display
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines to help
you level the camera vertically or horizontally.
A Menu Function Settings
COPY
157
A Menu Function Settings
Aspect ratioN
The image’s aspect ratio can be set to [3:2], [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1].
The area surrounding the Live View image is masked in black when
the following aspect ratios are set: [4:3] [16:9] [1:1].
JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio. 1 images
will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. Since the aspect
ratio information is appended to the 1 image, the image will be
generated in the respective aspect ratio when you process the 1
image with the provided software. In the case of the [4:3], [16:9], and
[1:1] aspect ratios, the aspect-ratio lines will appear during image
playback, but the lines are not actually drawn on the image.
Image
Quality
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (approx.)
3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1
35184x3456
(17.9 megapixels)
4608x3456
(16.0 megapixels)
5184x2912*
(15.1 megapixels)
3456x3456
(11.9 megapixels)
1
43456x2304
(8.0 megapixels)
3072x2304
(7.0 megapixels)
3456x1944
(6.7 megapixels)
2304x2304
(5.3 megapixels)
a2592x1728
(4.5 megapixels)
2304x1728
(4.0 megapixels)
2592x1456*
(3.8 megapixels)
1728x1728
(3.0 megapixels)
b1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
1696x1280*
(2.2 megapixels)
1920x1080
(2.1 megapixels)
1280x1280
(1.6 megapixels)
c720x480
(350,000 pixels)
640x480
(310,000 pixels)
720x400*
(290,000 pixels)
480x480
(230,000 pixels)
Asterisked image-recording qualities do not exactly match the set aspect
ratio.
The image area displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio is slightly larger
than the recorded area. Check the captured images on the LCD monitor
when shooting.
If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this
camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images may not be correctly printed.
COPY
158
A Menu Function Settings
Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time). In Basic Zone modes, metering timer is fixed at 16 sec.
The Live View shooting will stop with any of the following operations. To
resume Live View shooting, press the <A> button again.
• When selecting [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning],
[54: Clear settings], or [54: z firmware ver.]
Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed
Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image
recorded will have minimal noise. (The image quality of the Live View
image is different from that of the recorded image.)
COPY
159
You can select the AF method suiting the shooting conditions or subject. The
following AF methods are provided: [
u(face)+Tracking
], [
FlexiZone -
Multi
] (p.161), [
FlexiZone - Single
] (p.162), and [
Quick mode
] (p.166).
AF methods other than the [Quick mode] use the image sensor to
autofocus while displaying the Live View image.
Select the AF method.
Under the [
A
] tab, select [
AF method
].
Select the desired AF method, then
press <0>.
While the Live View image is
displayed, you can also press the
<Q> button to select the AF method
on the Quick Control screen (p.151).
Human faces are detected and focused. If a face moves, the AF point
<p> also moves to track the face.
1Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button.
XThe Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
2Select an AF point.
When a face is detected, the <
p
> AF point
will appear over the face to be focused.
If multiple faces are detected, <q>
will be displayed. Press the <U>
key to move the <q> frame over
the desired target face.
You can also tap the LCD monitor screen
to select the face or subject. If the subject
is not a face, < > will be displayed.
Changing the Autofocus Method (AF Method)
Selecting the AF Method
u(face)+Tracking: c
COPY
160
Changing the Autofocus Method (AF Method)
If no faces are detected or if you tap
the LCD monitor but do not select any
face or subject, the camera will switch
to [FlexiZone - Multi] with automatic
selection (p.161).
3Focus the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
XWhen focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
XIf focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
4Take the picture.
Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.146).
If the focus is far off, face detection will not be possible. If you set
[Continuous AF] to [Enable], you can prevent the image from becoming
greatly out of focus.
An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the
picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
The <p> may cover only part of the face.
If you press <0> or the <L> button, the AF point < > will appear at
the center and you can use the <S> keys to move the AF point.
Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the picture,
the <
p
> will be grayed out. If you press the shutter button halfway, the
subject will be focused in FlexiZone - Multi method with automatic
selection.
COPY
161
Changing the Autofocus Method (AF Method)
Up to 31 AF points (automatically selected) covering a wide area can be
used to focus. This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for
focusing (zone selection).
1Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button.
XThe Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
2Select the AF zone. N
Pressing <0> or the <L> button
will toggle between automatic
selection and zone selection. In Basic
Zone modes, automatic selection is
set automatically.
Use the <S> keys to select a zone.
To return to the center zone, press
<0> or the <L> button again.
You can also tap the LCD monitor
screen to select a zone. When a zone
is selected, tap [ ] on the screen
to switch to automatic selection.
FlexiZone - Multi: o
When [Continuous AF] (p.156) or [Movie servo AF] (p.196) is set to
[Enable]
When [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Multi] with automatic selection is
set, the AF point will be momentarily displayed in the image center if the
subject is not detected. If you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will focus in FlexiZone - Multi method with automatic selection. If
you press the shutter button halfway during movie shooting, the center
AF point will be used to focus.
Area frame
COPY
162
Changing the Autofocus Method (AF Method)
3Focus the subject.
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
XWhen focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
XIf focus is not achieved, the area
frame will turn orange.
4Take the picture.
Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.146).
Since only one AF point is used to focus, you can focus the target subject.
1Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button.
XThe Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
XThe AF point < > will appear. During
movie shooting, if [Movie servo AF]
is set to [Enable], the AF point will be
displayed in a larger size.
FlexiZone - Single: d
When the camera does not focus the desired target subject with
automatic AF point selection, switch the AF method to zone selection or
[FlexiZone - Single], and refocus.
Depending on the aspect ratio setting, the number of AF points will differ.
At [3:2], there will be 31 AF points. At [1:1] and [4:3], there will be 25 AF
points. At [16:9], 21 AF points. Also, at [16:9], there will be only three
zones.
For movie shooting, there will be 21 AF points (or 25 AF points if
[640x480] is set) and three zones (or 9 zones if [640x480] is set).
AF point
COPY
163
Changing the Autofocus Method (AF Method)
2Move the AF point.
Press the <S> key to move the AF
point to where you want to focus. (It
cannot be moved to the edges of the
picture.) To return the AF point to the
center, press <0> or the <L>
button.
You can also tap the LCD monitor
screen to move the AF point.
3Focus the subject.
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
XWhen focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
XIf focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
4Take the picture.
Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.146).
COPY
164
Changing the Autofocus Method (AF Method)
AF Operation
Focusing will take longer than with [Quick mode].
Even when focus has been achieved, pressing the shutter button
halfway will focus again.
The image brightness may change during and after the AF operation.
If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,
the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,
exit Live View shooting and autofocus under the actual light source.
When [FlexiZone - Multi] is set and you press the <u> button (or
tap < > on the screen), the center of the selected zone (or image
center with automatic selection) will be magnified. If you press the
shutter button halfway, the display will return to normal and the
camera will focus.
When [FlexiZone - Single] is set and you press the <u> button (or
tap < >
on the screen), the area covered by the AF point will be
magnified. Press the shutter button halfway to focus while in the
magnified view. This is effective when the camera is attached to a
tripod and you need to attain very precise focus. If focusing is difficult
in the magnified view, return to the normal display and use AF. Note
that the AF speed may differ between the normal and magnified views.
If you magnify the view after focusing with [FlexiZone - Multi] or
[FlexiZone - Single] in the normal view, it may not look focused.
If [u+Tracking] is set, magnified view is not possible.
Notes About [
u+Tracking
], [
FlexiZone
- Multi], and
[
FlexiZone
- Single]
If you shoot a peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus, aim the
center AF point or zone over the subject to focus, focus again and then
take the picture.
The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However, if an EX-series
Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used, the LED
light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.
In magnified view, the higher the magnification, the more difficult
focusing will be because of camera shake when shooting hand-held (as
well as when the lens focus mode switch is set to <MF>). Using a tripod
is recommended.
COPY
165
Changing the Autofocus Method (AF Method)
Shooting conditions that make focusing difficult
Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces
or when highlights or shadow details are lost.
Subjects in low light.
Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
Subjects with repetitive patterns (skyscraper windows, computer
keyboards, etc.).
Fine lines and subject outlines.
Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps changing.
Night scenes or points of light.
When the image flickers under fluorescent or LED light sources.
Extremely small subjects.
Subjects at the edge of the picture.
Subjects strongly reflecting light.
The AF point covers both a near and faraway subject (such as an
animal in a cage).
Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still
due to camera shake or subject blur.
A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
Autofocusing while the subject is very far out of focus.
Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
A special effect filter is used.
Noise (spots, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
If focus is not achieved with the above shooting conditions, set the lens
focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.
If you use AF with any of the following lenses, using [Quick mode] is
recommended. If you use the [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi] or
[FlexiZone - Single] for AF, it may take a longer time to achieve focus or
the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.
EF50mm f/1.4 USM, EF50mm f/1.8 II, EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro,
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM
For information on discontinued lenses, refer to your local Canon Web
site.
COPY
166
Changing the Autofocus Method (AF Method)
The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in One-Shot AF operation
(p.98), using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting.
Although you can focus the target subject quickly, the Live View image
will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation.
You can use nine AF points to focus (automatically selected). You can
also select one AF point to focus and focus only the area covered by
that AF point (manually selected). In Basic Zone modes, the AF point
will be selected automatically. You cannot select the AF point.
1Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button.
XThe Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
The small boxes are the AF points.
2Select the AF point. N
Pressing <0> or the <L> button
will toggle between automatic
selection and manual selection.
Use the <S> keys to select an AF
point. To return the AF point to the
center, press <0> or the <L>
button.
You can also tap the LCD monitor
screen to select the AF point. During
manual selection, tap [ ] on the
screen to switch to automatic
selection.
Quick Mode: f
AF point
COPY
167
Changing the Autofocus Method (AF Method)
3Focus the subject.
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
XThe Live View image will turn off, the
reflex mirror will go back down, and
AF will be executed. (No picture is
taken.)
XWhen focus is achieved, the AF point
that achieved focus will turn green
and the Live View image will
reappear.
XIf focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange and blink.
4Take the picture.
Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.146).
When [Quick mode] is set, [Continuous AF] cannot be set (p.156).
The [Quick mode] cannot be set for movie shooting.
You cannot take a picture during autofocusing. Take the picture while the
Live View image is displayed.
COPY
168
Just by tapping the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the
picture automatically. This works in all shooting modes.
1Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button.
XThe Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
2Enable the touch shutter.
Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom left.
Each time you tap the icon, it will
toggle between [y] and [x].
[x] (Touch Shutter: Enable)
Enables you to focus and shoot by
tapping the screen.
[y] (Touch Shutter: Disable)
You can tap where you want to focus
on the screen. Then press the shutter
button completely to shoot.
3Tap the screen to shoot.
Tap the face or subject on the screen.
XAt the point you tap, the camera will
focus in the AF method that was set
(p.159-167). When [FlexiZone -
Multi] is set, it will switch to
[FlexiZone - Single].
XWhen focus is achieved, the AF point
turns green and the picture is taken
automatically.
If focus is not achieved, the AF point
turns orange. Tap the face or subject
on the screen again.
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
COPY
169
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
Even if <i> (continuous shooting) is set, single shooting will take
effect.
The touch shutter does not work with the magnified view.
When [6: Shutter/AE lock button] is set to [1: AE lock/AF] or [3: AE/
AF, no AE lock] under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], autofocusing
does not take effect.
You can also enable the touch shutter by setting [Touch Shutter:
Enable] in the [A] tab.
To take a bulb exposure, tap the screen twice. The first tap on the screen
will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the exposure. Be
careful not to shake the camera when tapping the screen.
COPY
170
You can magnify the image and focus precisely with manual focus.
1Set the lens focus mode switch to
<MF>.
Turn the lens focusing ring to focus
roughly.
2Display the magnifying frame.
Press the <u> button.
XThe magnifying frame will appear.
You can also tap [ ] on the screen to
magnify the image.
3Move the magnifying frame.
Press the <S> key to move the
magnifying frame to the position
where you want to focus.
To return the magnifying frame to the
center, press <
0
> or the <
L
> button.
4Magnify the image.
Each time you press the <u> button,
the magnification within the frame will
change as follows:
5Focus manually.
While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
After achieving focus, press the <u>
button to return to the normal view.
6Take the picture.
Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button to take the
picture (p.146).
MF: Focus Manually
Magnifying frame
AE lock
Magnified area position
Magnification
1x
→
5x
→
10x
→
Magnification canceled
COPY
171
Live View Shooting Cautions
Image Quality
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
If Live View shooting is used continuously for a long period, the camera’s
internal temperature may rise, and image quality may deteriorate. Stop
Live View shooting when not shooting images.
If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is
high, image quality may deteriorate. Stop Live View shooting and wait a
few minutes before shooting again.
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live
View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white icon <s>
will appear. If you continue shooting while this icon is displayed, the
image quality of still photos may deteriorate. It is recommended to
temporarily exit Live View shooting and allow the camera to cool down
before shooting again.
If the camera’s internal temperature further increases while the white
icon <s> is displayed, a red icon <E> will start blinking. This blinking
icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop automatically. If
this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the camera’s
internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the camera
rest for a while.
Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period
will cause the <s> and <E> icons to appear earlier. When you are not
shooting, turn off the camera.
If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the image quality of high ISO
speed images or long exposures may be degraded even before the white
icon
<s> is displayed.
COPY
172
Live View Shooting Cautions
Shooting Result
If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out
as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture. In
magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in
orange. Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be
captured in the normal view.
If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.125) is not set to [Disable], the
image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation or
decreased flash exposure compensation is set.
If you use a TS-E lens (other than the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm
f/3.5L II) and shift or tilt the lens or use an Extension Tube, the standard
exposure may not be obtained or an irregular exposure may result.
Live View Image
Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect
the brightness of the captured image.
If the light source within the image changes, the screen may flicker. If this
happens, exit Live View shooting and resume shooting under the actual
light source.
If you point the camera to a different direction, it may throw off the Live
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness
level stabilizes before shooting.
If there is a very bright light source in the picture, the bright area might
appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image
will correctly show the bright area.
In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting,
chrominance noise may appear in the Live View image. However, the
chrominance noise will not be recorded in the captured image.
When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
Custom Functions
During Live View shooting, certain Custom Function settings will not take
effect (p.297).
Lens and Flash
The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when
using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode
marketed since the second half of 2011.
FE lock is not possible when the built-in flash or an external Speedlite is
used. Modeling flash will not work with an external Speedlite.
COPY
173
Shooting Movies
You can shoot movies by setting
the power switch to <k>. The
movie recording format will be
MOV.
Cards that can record movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card rated SD
Speed Class 6 “ ” or higher.
If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie
may not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a
card with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back
properly.
To check the card’s read/write speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s Web site.
About Full HD 1080
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-
Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning
lines).
COPY
174
Connecting the camera to a TV set is recommended to play back the
movies shot (p.262, 265).
When the shooting mode is not set to <a>, autoexposure control will
take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness.
1Set the power switch to <k>.
XThe reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
2Set the shooting mode.
Set the Mode Dial to any shooting
mode except <a>.
3Focus the subject.
Before shooting a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (p.159-167, 170).
By default, [Movie Servo AF:
Enable] is set so that the camera will
always focus. To stop Movie Servo
AF, see page 196.
4Shoot the movie.
Press the <A> button to start
shooting a movie. To stop movie
shooting, press <A> again.
XWhile the movie is being shot, the
“o” mark will be displayed on the
upper right of the screen.
k Shooting Movies
Autoexposure Shooting
Recording movie
Microphone
COPY
175
k Shooting Movies
This camera is compatible with the function turning on the LED light
automatically in low-light conditions during autoexposure shooting. For
details, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately) Equipped with an LED Light
Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 200 and 201.
If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages
171 and 172.
In Basic Zone modes, the shooting result will be the same as in the
<A> mode. Also, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera
is displayed on the upper left (p.176).
In the <f> and <s> shooting modes, the settings will be the same
as in the <d> mode.
Settable menu functions will differ between Basic Zone modes and
Creative Zone modes (p.322).
The ISO speed (ISO 100 - ISO 6400), shutter speed, and aperture are
set automatically.
In Creative Zone modes, you can press the <A> button to lock the
exposure (AE lock, p.123,198). After applying AE lock during movie
shooting, you can cancel it by pressing the <S> button. (AE lock setting
is retained until you press the <S> button.)
In Creative Zone modes, you can hold down the <O> button and turn
the <6> dial to set the exposure compensation.
Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed and ISO
speed at the bottom of the screen. This is the exposure setting for taking
a still photo (p.179). The exposure setting for movie shooting is not
displayed. Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ
from that for still photo shooting.
If you shoot a movie with autoexposure, the shutter speed and aperture
will not be recorded in the image information (Exif).
COPY
176
k Shooting Movies
During movie shooting in a Basic Zone mode, an icon representing the
scene detected by the camera will be displayed and the shooting will be
adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the
icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF method is
set, the “Non-Portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension Tube
or Closeup Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
Scene Icons
Subject
Portrait*1
Non-Portrait Background
Color
Background
Nature and
Outdoor Scene Close*2
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue sky included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset *3 *3 Orange
Spotlight
Dark blue
Dark
COPY
177
k Shooting Movies
In the <a> mode, you can freely set the shutter speed, aperture, and
ISO speed for the movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot
movies is for advanced users.
1Set the power switch to <k>.
XThe reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
2Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
3Set the shutter speed and
aperture.
To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. The settable shutter
speeds depend on the frame rate
<9>.
•8 / 7: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
•6 / 5 / 4: 1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
To set the aperture, hold down the
<O> button and turn the <6>
dial.
4 Set the ISO speed.
Press the <i> button and press
the <U> key or turn the <6> dial
to select the ISO speed.
For details on the ISO speed, see the
next page.
Manual Exposure Shooting
<6>
<O> + <6>
COPY
178
k Shooting Movies
5Focus and shoot the movie.
The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.174).
ISO speed during manual-exposure shooting
With [Auto], the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 -
ISO 6400.
You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 6400 in
whole-stop increments. Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if
[2: ISO expansion] is set to [1: On], the manual setting range will
expand so you can also select H (equivalent to ISO 12800).
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone
priority] is set to [1: Enable], the ISO speed will be ISO 200 - ISO
6400.
Since shooting a movie at ISO 12800 may result in much noise, it is
designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as “H”).
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set to
[1: On] and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting, the
manual setting range’s maximum will be H (equivalent to ISO 12800).
Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not
revert to the original setting.
Exposure compensation cannot be set.
Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not
recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
After recomposing the picture, you can see the exposure level difference
on the exposure level indicator (p.179) compared to when you pressed
the <A> button.
By pressing the <B> button, you can display the histogram.
When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
COPY
179
k Shooting Movies
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
Information Display
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Exposure mode
L
: Autoexposure
K
: Manual exposure
ISO speed
Exposure level indicator
Aperture
AE lock
White balance
Movie recording
size
Image-recording
quality
Shutter speed
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
AF method
• c: u+Tracking
• o: FlexiZone - Multi
• d: FlexiZone - Single
Battery check
Picture Style
Movie shooting mode
: Autoexposure
(Basic Zone modes)
: Autoexposure
(Creative Zone modes)
: Manual exposure
LED light
Recording level:
Manual
Video snapshot
Possible shots
Highlight tone priority
Frame rate
Drive mode
Magnified view
GPS connection indicator
Quick Control
Movie Servo AF
Movie shooting remaining time/
Elapsed time
Eye-Fi card
transmission
Digital compass
Wind filter
Attenuator
When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will change
to the elapsed time.
COPY
180
k Shooting Movies
Notes on Movie Shooting
During movie shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The sun’s
heat can damage the camera’s internal components.
If <Q> is set, you should not change the ISO speed or aperture during
movie shooting because it may also change the white balance.
If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie may flicker.
Zooming the lens during movie shooting is not recommended. Zooming
the lens can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the
lens’ maximum aperture changes or not. Exposure changes may be
recorded as a result.
You cannot magnify the image during movie shooting.
Be careful not to cover the microphone (p.174) with your finger, etc.
Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 200 and 201.
If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages
171 and 172.
Movie-related settings are under the [Z1] and [Z2] tabs (p.196).
A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the file size
exceeds 4 GB, a new file will be automatically created.
The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with movie recording
size set to [A]).
The sound will be recorded in stereo by the camera’s built-in microphone
(p.174).
Most commercially-available external stereo microphones with a 3.5 mm
diameter miniplug can be connected to the camera. If an external
microphone has been connected to the camera’s external microphone IN
terminal (p.20), it will be given priority over the built-in microphone.
You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.307) to start
and stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is <Q>. Set the shooting
timing switch to <2> (2-sec. delay), then press the transmit button. If the
switch is set to <o> (immediate shooting), still photo shooting will take
effect.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, the total movie shooting time
will be as follows: approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
and approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at low temperature (0°C/32°F).
The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting only when using
a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode marketed
since the second half of 2011.
COPY
181
k Shooting Movies
The final image simulation is a function that allows you to see the
effects of the Picture Style, white balance, etc., on the image.
During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically reflect
the effects of the settings listed below.
Final image simulation for movie shooting
Picture Style
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will
be reflected.
White balance
White balance correction
Exposure
Depth of field
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Highlight tone priority
Final Image Simulation
COPY
182
k Shooting Movies
While shooting a movie, you can also
take a still photo by pressing the shutter
button completely.
Taking still photos during movie shooting
If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record
a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.
The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie
shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is
displayed.
The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card.
Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below. Other
functions will be the same as for movie shooting.
* If highlight tone priority is set, the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200.
Shooting Still Photos
Function Settings
Image-
Recording
Quality
As set in [z1: Image quality].
When the movie recording size is [1920x1080] or [1280x720], the
aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is [640x480], the aspect
ratio will be 4:3.
ISO Speed*
• With autoexposure shooting: Automatically set within ISO 100 -
ISO 6400.
• With manual exposure shooting: See “ISO speed during
manual-exposure shooting” on page 178.
Exposure
Setting
• Autoexposure shooting: Automatically-set shutter speed and
aperture (displayed when pressing the shutter button halfway).
• Manual exposure shooting: Manually-set shutter speed and
aperture.
AEB Canceled
Flash Flash off
Regardless of the drive mode setting, single shooting will take effect for still
photo shooting during movie shooting.
COPY
183
k Shooting Movies
When you press the shutter button halfway to autofocus during movie
shooting, the following phenomena may occur.
• Focus may become far off momentarily.
• The brightness of the recorded movie may be different from that of the
actual scene.
• The recorded movie may be momentarily still.
• Lens operation noise may be recorded.
• You may not take a still photo when focus is not achieved in cases such as
the subject is moving.
COPY
184
Function settings particular to movie shooting are explained here.
If you press the <
Q
> button while the image is displayed on the LCD
monitor, you can set any of the following:
AF method, drive mode,
image-recording quality (still photos), movie-recording size,
video snapshots, white balance, Picture Style, and Auto Lighting
Optimizer.
In Basic Zone modes, only the functions in bold can be set.
1Press the <Q> button. (7)
XThe settable functions will be
displayed.
2Select a function and set it.
Press the <V> key to select a
function.
XThe function and Feature guide (p.52)
will appear.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to change the setting.
To set the drive mode’s <q> setting
or Picture Style parameters, press the
<B> button.
3Exit the setting.
Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to movie shooting.
You can also select <2> to return to
movie shooting.
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
COPY
185
The menu option [Z2: Movie rec. size]
enables you to select the movie’s image
size [****x****] and frame rate [9]
(frames recorded per second). The 9
(frame rate) switches automatically
depending on the [52: Video system]
setting.
Image size
A[1920x1080] : Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality.
The aspect ratio will be 16:9.
B[1280x720] : High-Definition (HD) recording quality.
The aspect ratio will be 16:9.
C[640x480] : Standard-definition recording quality.
The aspect ratio will be 4:3.
Frame rate (fps: frames per second)
6/8: For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America,
Japan, Korea, Mexico, etc.).
5/7: For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia,
China, Australia, etc.).
4: Mainly for motion pictures.
3 Setting the Movie-recording Size
COPY
186
3 Setting the Movie-recording Size
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
About Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting
without interruption.
During movie shooting, approx. 30 sec. before the movie reaches
the 4 GB file size, the elapsed shooting time displayed in the movie
shooting screen will start blinking. If you keep shooting the movie
and the file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created
automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code will stop
blinking.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file
individually. Movie files cannot play back consecutively automatically.
After the movie playback ends, select the next movie to be played.
Movie Shooting Time Limit
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If
the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically. You can resume movie shooting by pressing
the <A> button. (A new movie file is recorded.)
Movie-Recording
Size
Total Recording Time (approx.) File Size
(approx.)
4 GB Card 8 GB Card 16 GB Card
[1920x1080]
6
11 min. 22 min. 44 min. 330 MB/min.5
4
[1280x720]811 min. 22 min. 44 min. 330 MB/min.
7
[640x480]646 min. 1 hr. 32 min. 3 hr. 4 min. 82.5 MB/min.
5
An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting
to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table above (p.200).
COPY
187
You can easily create a short movie with the video snapshot function.
A video snapshot is a short movie clip lasting approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8
sec. A collection of video snapshots is called a video snapshot album
and can be saved to the card as a single movie file. By changing the
scene or angle in each video snapshot, you can create dynamic short
movies.
A video snapshot album can also be played together with background
music (p.193, 255).
1Select [Video snapshot].
Under the [Z2] tab, select [Video
snapshot], then press <0>.
2Select [Enable].
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration
Video Snapshot Album Concept
Video snapshot album
Video
snapshot 1
Video
snapshot 2
Video
snapshot x
COPY
188
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
3Select [Album settings].
Select [Album settings], then press
<0>.
If you want to continue shooting for
an existing album, go to “Adding to an
Existing Album” (p.192).
4Select [Create a new album].
Select [Create a new album], then
press <0>.
5Select the Snapshot length.
Press <0> and use <V> to select
the snapshot’s length, then press
<0>.
6Select [OK].
Select [OK], then press <0>.
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to the movie
shooting screen. A blue bar will
appear to indicate the snapshot
length.
Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.189).
Shooting duration
COPY
189
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
7Shoot the first video snapshot.
Press the <A> button and shoot.
XThe blue bar indicating the shooting
duration will gradually decrease. After
the set shooting duration elapses, the
shooting stops automatically.
X
After the LCD monitor turns off and the
access lamp stops blinking, the
confirmation screen will appear (p.190).
8Save as a video snapshot album.
Press the <U> key to select
[JSave as album], then press
<0>.
XThe movie clip will be saved as the
video snapshot album’s first video
snapshot.
9Continue to shoot more video
snapshots.
Repeat step 7 to shoot the next video
snapshot.
Press the <U> key to select
[JAdd to album], then press <0>.
To create another video snapshot
album, select [W Save as a new
album], then select [OK].
Creating a Video Snapshot Album
COPY
190
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
10
Quit the video snapshot shooting.
Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable].
To return to normal movie
shooting, be sure to set [Disable].
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to the normal movie
shooting screen.
On-screen Options in Steps 8 and 9
Function Description
JSave as album
(Step 8)
The movie clip will be saved as the video
snapshot album’s first video snapshot.
JAdd to album
(Step 9)
The video snapshot just recorded will be added
to the album recorded immediately before.
W Save as a new album
(Step 9)
A new video snapshot album is created and the
movie clip is saved as the first video snapshot.
The new album will be a different file from the
previously recorded album.
1 Playback video snapshot
(Steps 8 and 9)
The video snapshot just recorded will be played.
For playback operations, see the table on the
next page.
rDo not save to album
(Step 8)
rDelete without saving to
album (Step 9)
If you want to delete the video snapshot you just
recorded and not save it to the album, select
[OK].
COPY
191
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
[Playback video snapshot] Operations
*With [Skip backward/Skip forward], the skipping duration will correspond to the
number of seconds set under [Video snapshot] (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec.).
Function Playback Description
7 Play By pressing <0>, you can play or pause the just-recorded
video snapshot.
5 First frame Displays the first scene of the album’s first video snapshot.
Skip backward
*Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips back by
a few seconds.
3
Previous frame
Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is displayed.
If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-
frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the movie.
Skip forward* Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips forward
by a few seconds.
4 Last frame Displays the last scene of the album’s last video snapshot.
Playback position
mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)
9 Volume You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.254) volume by
turning the <6> dial.
32Pressing the <M> button returns to the previous screen.
COPY
192
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
1Select [Add to existing album].
Follow step 4 on page 188 to select
[Add to existing album], then press
<0>.
2Select an existing album.
Press the <U> key to select an
album, then press <0>.
Check the text, select [OK], then
press <0>.
XCertain video snapshot settings will
change to match the existing album’s
settings.
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to the movie
shooting screen.
3Shoot the video snapshot.
Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.189).
Adding to Existing Album
You cannot select an album shot with another camera.
COPY
193
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
You can play back a completed album in the same way as a normal
movie (p.254).
1Play back the movie.
Press the <x> button to display
images.
2Select the album.
Press the <
U
> key to select an album.
On the single-image display, the
[ ] icon displayed on the upper
left indicates that the image is a video
snapshot.
3Play back the album.
Press <0>.
On the movie playback panel
displayed, select [7] (Play), then
press <0>.
Playing an Album
Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots
You can add to an album only video snapshots with the same duration
(approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each).
Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a
new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.
• Changing the [Movie rec. size] (p.185).
• Changing the [Sound rec.] setting from [Auto/Manual] to [Disable] or
from [Disable] to [Auto/Manual] (p.198).
• Updating the firmware.
You cannot take still photos while shooting a video snapshot.
The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate.
Depending on the frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during
playback may not be exact.
COPY
194
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
After shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the video
snapshots in the album.
1On the playback panel, select [X]
(Edit).
XThe editing screen will be displayed.
2Select an editing operation.
Use the <U> keys to select an
editing operation, then press <0>.
Editing an Album
Background Music
Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private
enjoyment. Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder.
You can play background music when you play back albums, normal
movies, and slide shows on the camera (p.
255, 258
). To play background
music, you must first copy the background music to the card using EOS
Utility (provided software). For information on how to copy the background
music, refer to the Software Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM.
Function Description
Move snapshot
Press the <U> key to select the video snapshot you
want to move, then press <0>. Press the <U> key to
move the snapshot, then press <0>.
Delete snapshot
Press the <
U
> key to select the video snapshot you
want to delete, then press <
0
>. The [
L
] icon will be
displayed on the selected video snapshot. Pressing <
0
>
again will cancel the selection and [
L
] will disappear.
Play snapshot Press the <U> key to select the video snapshot you
want to play, then press <0>.
COPY
195
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
3Save the edited album.
Press the <M> button to return to
the Editing panel at the screen’s
bottom.
Press the <U> key to select [W]
(Save), then press <0>.
XThe save screen will appear.
To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
Provided Software Usable with Albums
EOS Video Snapshot Task: Editing albums is possible. Add-on function
for ImageBrowser EX is automatically downloaded from the Internet
using auto update function.
If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
When the battery level is low, editing albums is not possible. Use a fully-
charged battery.
COPY
196
When you set the power switch to <k>, the [Z1/Z2] tab will show
functions dedicated to movie shooting. The menu options are as
follows.
[Z1] menu [Z2] menu
AF method
The AF methods are the same as described on pages 159-165. You
can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone -
Single].
Movie Servo AF
The default setting is [Enable]. You can focus by pressing the
shutter button halfway regardless of the setting.
• When [Enable] is set:
• You can shoot a movie while focusing a moving subject
continuously. Note that the camera may record the lens operation
noise. To reduce the recording of the lens operation noise, use a
commercially-available external microphone. Using an STM-
series lens can minimize the focusing noise recorded during
movie shooting.
• During Movie Servo AF, turn off the power before you set the
lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>.
3 Movie Menu Function Settings
COPY
197
3 Movie Menu Function Settings
• If you want to hold the focus at a certain point or avoid recording
the lens operation noise before or during movie shooting, you
can temporally stop Movie Servo AF by performing one of the
operations below. When you stop Movie Servo AF, the AF point
will turn gray. When you perform the same operation below
again, Movie Servo AF will resume.
• Tap the [ ] icon on the lower left of the screen.
• Press the <D> button.
• If [6: Shutter/AE lock button] is set to [2: AF/AF lock, no AE
lock] in the [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], Movie Servo AF
will stop while you hold down the <A> button. When you let go
of the <A> button, Movie Servo AF will resume.
• While Movie Servo AF is stopped, if you press the <M>
button, <x> button etc. and then return to movie shooting,
Movie Servo AF will resume.
• For cautions when [Movie servo AF] is set to [Enable], see
page 202.
• When [Disable] is set:
• You can focus only when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
AF with shutter button during k (movie recording)
When you press the shutter button while shooting a movie, you can
shoot a still photo. The default setting is [ONE SHOT].
• When [ONE SHOT] is set:
• You can refocus and shoot a still photo by pressing the shutter
button halfway while shooting a movie.
• When shooting a static subject (not moving), you can perform
shooting in precise focus.
• When [Disable] is set:
• You can immediately start shooting a still photo by pressing the
shutter button, even though focus is not achieved. It is effective
when you want give priority to the shutter chance rather than to
focus.
COPY
198
3 Movie Menu Function Settings
Grid display
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines to help
you level the camera vertically or horizontally.
Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
Movie recording size
You can set the movie recording size (image size and frame rate).
For details, see pages 185-186.
Sound recordingN
Normally, the built-in microphone will
record stereo sound. If a commercially-
available microphone equipped with a
mini plug (3.5 mm diameter) is
connected to the camera’s external
microphone IN terminal (p.20), it will be
given priority.
[Sound rec./Rec. level] options
[Auto] : The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically.
Auto level control will operate automatically in
response to the sound level.
[Manual] : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound
recording level to one of 64 levels. Select [Rec. level]
and look at the level meter while pressing the <U>
key to adjust the sound recording level.
While looking at the peak hold indicator (approx. 3
sec.), adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights
up the “12” (-12 dB) mark on the right for the loudest
sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the sound will be distorted.
[Disable] : Sound will not be recorded.
Level meter
COPY
199
3 Movie Menu Function Settings
[Wind filter]
When set to [Enable], it reduces wind noise when there is wind
outdoors. This feature takes effect only with the built-in
microphone.
Note that [Enable] will also reduce low bass sounds, so set this
function to [Disable] when there is no wind. It will record a more
natural sound than with [Enable].
[Attenuator]
Even if you set [Sound recording] to [Auto] or [Manual] and
shoot, sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud sound.
In such a case, setting it to [Enable] is recommended.
Video snapshot
You can shoot video snapshots. For details, see page 187.
In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] will
be [On/Off]. If [On] is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted
automatically (same as with [Auto]). However, the wind filter function will
not take effect.
The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
Both L and R record audio at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
COPY
200
Movie Shooting Cautions
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white icon <s> will
appear. Even if you shoot a movie while this icon is displayed, the
movie’s image quality will hardly be affected. However, if you shoot still
photos, the image quality of the still photos may deteriorate. It is
recommended to stop still photo shooting for a while and allow the
camera to cool down.
If the camera’s internal temperature further increases while the white
icon <s> is displayed, a red icon <E> will start blinking. This blinking
icon indicates that movie shooting will soon stop automatically. If this
happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the camera’s internal
temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a
while.
Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause
the <s> and <E> icons to appear earlier. When you are not shooting,
turn off the camera.
Recording
If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie
shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots. If you use a
tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, it is recommended to set
the IS switch to <2>.
The camera’s built-in microphone will also pick up camera operation
noise. Using a commercially-available external microphone can prevent
(or reduce) these noises from being recorded.
Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.
If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, that part
may look momentarily still when you play back the movie. In such cases,
shoot movies with manual exposure.
COPY
201
Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording
If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level
indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie
shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer
memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will
climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting
will stop automatically.
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either
not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.
First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
If there is a very bright light source in the picture, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. In movies, the bright areas will be
recorded in almost the same way you see it on the LCD monitor.
Still Photo Shooting During Movie Shooting
Regarding the image quality of still photos, see “Image Quality” on page
171.
TV Connection
If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.262, 265) and shoot a movie,
the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the
sound will be properly recorded.
Indicator
COPY
202
Cautions when [Movie servo AF] is set to [Enable]
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.
Also refer to “Shooting conditions that make focusing difficult” on page
165.
• Since using Movie Servo AF will consume battery power, the number of
possible shots and the possible movie shooting time will be reduced.
• During zooming or image magnification, Movie Servo AF operation will be
stopped momentarily.
•During movie shooting, if a subject approaches / moves away, or if
the camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the
recorded movie image may momentarily expand or contract (change
in image magnification).
COPY
203
Handy Features
Disabling the Beeper (p.204)
Card Reminder (p.204)
Setting the Image Review Time (p.204)
Setting the Auto Power-off Time (p.205)
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness (p.205)
Creating and Selecting a Folder (p.206)
File Numbering Methods (p.208)
Setting Copyright Information (p.210)
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images (p.212)
Checking Camera Settings (p.213)
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings (p.214)
Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically
(p.217)
Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color (p.217)
Setting the Flash (p.218)
Automatic Sensor Cleaning (p.223)
Appending Dust Delete Data (p.224)
Manual Sensor Cleaning (p.226)
COPY
204
You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved,
during self-timer operation, and during touch screen operations.
Under the [z1] tab, select [Beep], then
press <0>. Select [Disable], then
press <0>.
To silence the beeper only during touch
screen operations, select [Touch to ].
This setting prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera.
Under the [z1] tab, select [Release
shutter without card], then press
<0>. Select [Disable], then press
<0>.
If there is no card inserted in the camera
and you press the shutter button, “Card”
will be displayed in the viewfinder, and
you cannot release the shutter.
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor
immediately after capture. If [Off] is set, the image will not be displayed
immediately after image capture. If [Hold] is set, the image review will
be displayed up until the [Auto power off] time.
During image review, if you operate any camera controls such as
pressing the shutter button halfway, the image review will end.
Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
review], then press <0>. Select the
desired setting, then press <0>.
Handy Features
3 Disabling the Beeper
3 Card Reminder
3 Setting the Image Review Time
COPY
205
Handy Features
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after the set
time of idle operation elapses. You can set this auto power-off time.
When the camera has turned off due to auto power off, you can turn it
on again by pressing the shutter button halfway or pressing any of the
following buttons: <M>, <B>, <x>, <A>, etc.
If [Disable] is set, either turn off the camera or press the <B>
button to turn off the LCD monitor to save battery power.
Even when [Disable] is set, if the camera is not used for 30 min.,
the LCD monitor will turn off automatically. To turn on the LCD
monitor again, press the <B> button.
Under the [52] tab, select [Auto power
off], then press <0>. Select the desired
setting, then press <0>.
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to read.
Under the [52] tab, select [LCD
brightness], then press <0>. With the
adjustment screen displayed, press the
<U> key to adjust the brightness, then
press <0>.
When checking the exposure of an
image, set the LCD monitor brightness to
4 and prevent the ambient light from
affecting the reviewed image.
3 Setting the Auto Power-off Time
3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness
COPY
206
Handy Features
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for
saving captured images.
Creating a Folder
1Select [Select folder].
Under the [51] tab, select [Select
folder], then press <0>.
2Select [Create folder].
Select [Create folder], then press
<0>.
3Create a new folder.
Select [OK], then press <0>.
XA new folder with the folder number
increased by one is created.
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
COPY
207
Handy Features
Selecting a Folder
With the folder selection screen
displayed, select a folder and press
<0>.
XThe folder where the captured
images will be saved is selected.
Subsequent captured images will be
recorded into the selected folder.
Number of images
in folder
Folder name
Lowest file number
Highest file number
About Folders
As with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits
(folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can
contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is
created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.209) is executed, a new
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can
be created.
Creating Folders with a Personal Computer
Open the card on the screen, and create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format
“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are the folder number, from 100 to 999.
The next five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case
letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be
used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit
folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”), even if the
other five characters in each name are different, since the camera cannot
recognize the folders.
COPY
208
Handy Features
The image files will be numbered from 0001 to 9999 in the order the
images are taken, then saved in a folder. You can change how the file
number is assigned.
The file number will appear on your computer in this format:
IMG_0001.JPG.
Under the [51] tab, select [File
numbering], then press <0>. The
available settings are described below.
Select the option, then press <0>.
[Continuous]: The file numbering continues in sequence even
after you replace the card or create a folder.
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file
numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is convenient
when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001
to 9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in your personal
computer.
However, if the replacement card or existing folder already contains
images recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images
may continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the
card or folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, use a
newly formatted card each time.
3 File Numbering Methods
0051
Card-1
0052
Card-2
File numbering after
replacing the card
Next sequential file number
100
0051
101
0052
Card-1
File numbering after
creating a folder
COPY
209
Handy Features
[Auto reset]: The file numbering restarts from 0001 each time
the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering
restarts from 0001 for the new images saved. This is convenient if
you want to organize images according to cards or folders.
However, if the replacement card or existing folder already contains
images recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images
may continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the
card or folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering
starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
[Manual reset]: To reset the file numbering to 0001 manually or
to start from file number 0001 in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder
starts from 0001.
This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images
taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After the
manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.
(There will be no Manual reset confirmation screen.)
0051
Card-1
0001
Card-2
File numbering is reset
100
0051
101
0001
Card-1
File numbering after
replacing the card
File numbering after
creating a folder
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a
message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”. Movie
file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG
images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “. MOV” for movies.
COPY
210
Handy Features
When you set the copyright information, it will be appended to the
image as Exif information.
1Select [Copyright information].
Under the [54] tab, select [Copyright
information], then press <0>.
2Select the option to be set.
Select [Enter author’s name] or
[Enter copyright details], then press
<0>.
XThe text entry screen will appear.
Select [Display copyright info.] to
check the copyright information
currently set.
Select [Delete copyright
information] to delete the copyright
information currently set.
3Enter text.
Refer to “Text Entry Procedure” on
the next page and enter the copyright
information.
Enter up to 63 alphanumeric
characters and symbols.
4Exit the setting.
After entering the text, press the
<M> button to exit.
On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK] and press <0>.
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
COPY
211
Handy Features
Text Entry Procedure
Changing the entry area:
Press the <Q> button to toggle
between the top and bottom entry
areas.
Moving the cursor:
Press the <U> key to move the
cursor.
Entering text:
In the bottom area, press the <S> key or turn the <6> dial to
select a character, then press <0> to enter it.
Changing the entry mode:*
Select [ ] at the bottom right of the bottom entry area. Each
time you press <0>, the entry mode will change as follows: Lower
case → Numerals / Symbols 1 → Numerals / Symbols 2 → Upper
case.
* When [Touch control: Disable] is set, you can display all the
available characters on one screen.
Deleting a character:
Press the <L> button to delete one character.
Exiting:
Press the <M> button, check the text, select [OK], then press
<0>. The screen in step 2 will reappear.
Canceling the text entry:
Press the <B> button, check the text, select [OK], then press
<0>. The screen in step 2 will reappear.
You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility
(provided software, p.364).
COPY
212
Handy Features
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they
are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD
monitor and on the personal computer instead of
horizontally. You can change the setting for this
feature.
Under the [51] tab, select [Auto rotate],
then press <0>. The available settings
are described below. Select the option,
then press <0>.
[OnzD]:
The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback
on both the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.
[OnD]: The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the
computer.
[Off] : The vertical image is not automatically rotated.
The vertical image is not rotated during the image review
immediately after it is captured.
Press the <x> button and the image playback will display the
rotated image.
[OnzD] is set, but the image does not rotate during playback.
Auto rotate will not work with vertical images captured while [Auto
rotate] was set to [Off].
If the vertical image is taken while the camera
is pointed up or down, the image may not be rotated automatically for
playback. In such a case, see “Rotating the Image” on page 247.
On the camera’s LCD monitor, I want to rotate an image
captured when [OnD] had been set.
Set [OnzD], then play back the image. It will be rotated.
The vertical image does not rotate on the computer screen.
The software used is not compatible with image rotation. Use the
software provided with the camera instead.
3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
FAQ
COPY
213
Handy Features
While the shooting settings (p.50) are displayed, press the <B>
button to display the camera’s major function settings.
B Checking Camera Settings
Date/Time (p.36)
WB correction (p.139)/
WB bracketing (p.140)
Color space (p.141)
Auto rotate display (p.212)
Auto power off (p.205)
Card remaining capacity
Settings display
Red-eye reduction (p.108)
Beeper (p.204)
Sensor cleaning (p.223)
Touch control (p.55)
Live View shooting (p.145)
LCD auto off (p.217)
Daylight saving time (p.37)
COPY
214
Handy Features
The camera’s shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to
their defaults. This option is available in Creative Zone modes.
1Select [Clear settings].
Under the [54] tab, select [Clear
settings], then press <0>.
2Select [Clear all camera settings].
Select [Clear all camera settings],
then press <0>.
3Select [OK].
Select [OK], then press <0>.
XSetting [Clear all camera settings]
will reset the camera to the default
settings as shown on the next page.
Clearing all camera settings:
After the procedure above, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)]
in [54: Clear settings] to clear all the Custom Function settings
(p.296).
3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN
FAQ
COPY
215
Handy Features
Shooting Settings Camera Settings
AF operation One-Shot AF Auto power off 30 sec.
AF point selection
Automatic selection
Beep Enable
Drive mode u
(Single shooting)
Release shutter
without card Enable
Metering mode q
(Evaluative metering)
ISO speed AUTO (Auto) Image review 2 sec.
ISO Auto Maximum 6400 Histogram display Brightness
Exposure
compensation/AEB Canceled Image jump with 6 e (10 images)
Auto rotate OnzD
Built-in flash settings Normal firing LCD brightness
Flash exposure
compensation 0 (Zero) LCD auto off Enable
Time zone Unchanged
Custom Functions Unchanged Date/Time Unchanged
External flash
function setting Unchanged Language Unchanged
Video system Unchanged
Image-recording Settings Screen color 1
Feature guide Enable
Image quality 73 Touch control Enable
Picture Style Auto Copyright
information Unchanged
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Standard
Peripheral illumination
correction
Enable/Correction
data retained
Control over HDMI Disable
Eye-Fi transmission Disable
Chromatic aberration
correction
Disable/Correction
data retained
My Menu settings Unchanged
Display from My
Menu Disable
Color space sRGB
White balance Q (Auto)
Custom White Balance
Canceled
White balance
correction
Canceled
White balance
bracketing Canceled
Long exposure noise
reduction Disable
High ISO speed noise
reduction Standard
File number Continuous
Auto cleaning Enable
Dust Delete Data Erased
COPY
216
Handy Features
Live View Shooting Movie Shooting
Live View shooting Enable AF method u+Tracking
AF method u+Tracking Movie Servo AF Enable
Continuous AF Enable AF with shutter
button during kONE SHOT
Touch Shutter Disable
Grid display Off
Aspect ratio 3:2 Grid display Off
Metering timer 16 sec. Metering timer 16 sec.
Movie recording size 1920x1080
Sound recording Auto
Video snapshot Disable
COPY
217
Handy Features
You can prevent the display-off sensor from turning off the shooting
setting display on the LCD monitor when your eye approaches the
viewfinder.
Under the [52] tab, select [LCD auto
off], then press <0>. Select [Disable],
then press <0>.
You can change the background color of the shooting settings screen.
Under the [53] tab, select [Screen
color], then press <0>. Select the
desired color, then press <0>.
When you exit the menu, the selected
color will be displayed for the shooting
settings screen.
3
Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically
3 Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color
COPY
218
The built-in flash and external Speedlite settings can be set with the
camera’s menu. You can use the camera’s menu to set the external
Speedlite function settings only if an EX-series Speedlite compatible
with this function is attached.
The setting procedure is the same as when setting a camera menu
function.
Select [Flash control].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Flash
control], then press <0>.
XThe flash control screen will appear.
Normally, set this to [Enable].
If [Disable] is set, neither the built-
in flash nor the external Speedlite
will fire. This is useful when you only
want to use the flash’s AF-assist
beam.
For normal flash exposures, set this
to [Evaluative].
[Average] is for advanced users. As
with an external Speedlite, the
metering area is averaged. Flash
exposure compensation may be
necessary.
3 Setting the FlashN
[Flash firing]
[E-TTL II meter.]
Even if [Flash firing] is set to [Disable], if focus is difficult to achieve in low
light, the flash may still fire a series of flashes (AF-assist beam, p.101).
COPY
219
3 Setting the FlashN
You can set the flash-sync speed for
flash photography in the aperture-priority
AE (f) mode.
: Auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200
sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is
also possible.
: 1/200-1/60 sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.
It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,
the background may come out dark.
: 1/200 sec. (fixed)
The flash-sync speed is fixed at 1/200 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60 sec.
auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out
darker than with [1/200-1/60 sec. auto].
[Flash sync. speed in Av mode]
If [1/200-1/60 sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is
not possible in the <f> mode.
COPY
220
3 Setting the FlashN
You can set the functions in the table below. The functions displayed under
[
External flash func. setting
] will vary depending on the Speedlite model.
Select [Built-in flash settings] or
[External flash func. setting].
XThe flash functions will be displayed.
With [Built-in flash settings], the
highlighted functions can be selected
and set.
[Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. settings] Functions
*For [FEB] (Flash exposure bracketing) and [Zoom], refer to the instruction
manual of a Speedlite compatible with the functions.
[Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. setting]
Function
[Built-in flash settings][External
flash func.
setting]
Page
Normal
Firing
Easy
Wireless
(p.231)
Custom
Wireless
(p.234)
Flash mode k k 221
Shutter
synchronization kk221
FEB* k
Wireless functions k k 229
Channel kk k232
Flash group k k 235
Flash exposure
compensation k k k k 120
Zoom* k
[Built-in flash settings][External flash func. setting]
Flash mode
Flash zoom
(Flash coverage)
Flash exposure
compensation
Wireless functions
Shutter
synchronization
FEB
Sample screen
COPY
221
3 Setting the FlashN
Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that the flash fires immediately
after the exposure starts.
If [2nd curtain] is set, the flash will fire right before the shutter
closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can
create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night. With E-TTL
II (auto flash exposure), two flashes will be fired: once when you
press the shutter button completely, and once immediately before
the exposure ends. Also, with shutter speeds faster than 1/30 sec.,
1st curtain synchronization will automatically take effect.
If an external Speedlite is attached, you can also select [Hi-speed]
(e). For details, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Wireless functions
When performing optical transmission wireless flash shooting using
the master function of the built-in flash, see “Wireless Flash
Photography” on page 229. When performing wireless flash
shooting with radio or optical transmission using the master function
of the external Speedlite, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Flash exposure compensation
See “Flash Exposure Compensation” on page 120.
Flash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.
[E-TTL II] is the standard mode of
EX-series Speedlites for automatic
flash shooting.
[Manual flash] is for advanced users
who want to set the [Flash output]
(1/1 to 1/128) themselves.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to
the instruction manual of a Speedlite
compatible with the functions.
COPY
222
3 Setting the FlashN
The Custom Functions displayed under [External flash C.Fn setting]
will vary depending on the Speedlite model.
1Display the Custom Function.
With the camera ready to shoot with
an external Speedlite, select
[External flash C.Fn setting], then
press <0>.
2Set the Custom Function.
Press the <U> key to select the
function number, then set the
function. The procedure is the same
as setting the camera’s Custom
Functions (p.296).
1Select [Clear settings].
Under the [z1: Flash control] tab,
select [Clear settings], then press
<0>.
2Select the settings to be cleared.
Select [Clear built-in flash set.],
[Clear external flash set.], or [Clear
ext. flash C.Fn set.], then press
<0>.
When you select [OK], the respective
flash settings will be cleared.
Setting the External Speedlite Custom Functions
Clear the Settings
COPY
223
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self
Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this
operation. However, you can choose to perform sensor cleaning at any
time, or disable it.
1Select [Sensor cleaning].
Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
2Select [Clean nowf].
Select [Clean nowf], then press
<0>.
Select [OK] on the dialog screen,
then press <0>.
XThe screen will indicate that the
sensor is being cleaned. (A small
sound may be heard.) Although there
will be a shutter sound during the
cleaning, a picture is not taken.
In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].
XThe sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the
power switch to <1> or <2>.
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Cleaning the Sensor Now
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning
For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed
upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.
Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]
option will remain disabled temporarily.
COPY
224
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for
erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital
Photo Professional (provided software, p.364) to erase the dust spots
automatically.
Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to infinity
(∞). If the lens has no distance scale, look at the front of the lens and
turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
1Select [Dust Delete Data].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Dust
Delete Data], then press <0>.
2Select [OK].
Select [OK] and press <0>. After
the automatic self-cleaning of the
sensor is performed, a message will
appear. Although there will be a
shutter sound during the cleaning, a
picture is not taken.
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
Preparation
Obtain the Dust Delete Data
COPY
225
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
3Photograph a solid-white object.
At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.
- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a
patternless, solid-white object and
take a picture.
X
The picture will be taken in aperture-
priority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
X
When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete
Data. When the Dust Delete Data is
obtained, a message will appear. Select
[
OK
], and the menu will reappear.
If the data was not obtained
successfully, an error message will
appear. Follow the “Preparation”
procedure on the preceding page, then
select [
OK
]. Take the picture again.
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG
and 1 images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is
recommended to update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (provided software,
p.364) to erase dust spots, refer to the Software Instruction Manual
(p.367) on the Software Instruction Manual CD-ROM.
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
About the Dust Delete Data
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the
paper has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software.
COPY
226
Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can
be removed manually with a blower, etc. Before cleaning the sensor,
detach the lens from the camera.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. If the
sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon
Service Center is recommended.
1Select [Sensor cleaning].
Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
2Select [Clean manually].
Select [Clean manually], then press
<0>.
3Select [OK].
Select [OK], then press <0>.
XIn a moment, the reflex mirror will
lockup and the shutter will open.
4Clean the sensor.
5End the cleaning.
Set the power switch to <2>.
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged. If the battery grip with size-
AA/LR6 batteries is attached, manual sensor cleaning will not be possible.
For the power source, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately) is
recommended.
COPY
227
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and
image sensor may get damaged.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Opening the battery compartment cover.
• Opening the card slot cover.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or
reflex mirror may get damaged.
Never use canned air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force can
damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor.
If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
COPY
COPY
229
Wireless Flash
Photography
You can use the built-in flash
for wireless flash shooting.
The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit
with Canon Speedlites with a wireless slave feature and
wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire.
Canceling the slave unit’s auto power off
To cancel the slave unit’s auto power off, press the
camera’s <A> button. If you are using manual flash
firing, press the slave unit’s test firing (PILOT) button to
cancel the auto power off.
Be sure to also read the information about wireless flash
photography in the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
COPY
230
Regarding your Speedlite (slave unit), refer to its instruction manual and
set it as follows. The settings other than the ones below for the slave
unit’s control are all set with the camera. Different types of Canon
Speedlite slave units can be used and controlled together.
(1) Set the Speedlite as a slave unit.
(2) Set the Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same channel
as set on the camera.*1
(3) If you want to set the flash ratio (p.236), set the slave unit ID.
(4)
Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown below.
(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.*2
*1: If the Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function, the camera
can work with any channel.
*2: In small rooms, the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not face the
camera. The camera’s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and be received by
the slave unit. When using an EX-series Speedlite with fixed flash head and wireless
sensor, take pictures to make sure it can fire.
Using Wireless FlashN
Slave Unit Settings and Position
Approx.
10 m
(32.8 ft.)
Approx.
7 m
(23.0 ft.)
Approx. 5 m
(16.4 ft.)
Approx. 7 m
(23.0 ft.)
Approx.
80°
Example of Wireless Flash Set-up
Indoors
Outdoors
The camera’s master unit function cannot be used for wireless flash
shooting with radio transmission.
COPY
231
The basics of easy, fully automatic wireless flash shooting are explained
below.
Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all
wireless flash shooting. Therefore,
these steps are omitted in the other
wireless flash setups explained on
the pages hereafter.
1Press the <I> button to raise the
built-in flash.
For wireless flash shooting, be sure
to raise the built-in flash.
2Select [Flash control].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Flash
control], then press <0>.
3Select [Evaluative].
For [E-TTL II meter.], select
[Evaluative], then press <0>.
Easy Wireless Flash Shooting
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite
COPY
232
Easy Wireless Flash Shooting
4Select [Built-in flash settings].
Select [Built-in flash settings], then
press <0>.
5Select [EasyWireless].
Under [Built-in flash], select
[EasyWireless], then press <0>.
6Set [Channel].
Set the transmission channel (1-4) to
the same one as the slave unit.
7Take the picture.
Set the camera and take picture in
the same way as with normal
shooting.
8Exit the wireless flash shooting.
For [Built-in flash], select
[NormalFiring].
Setting [E-TTL II meter.] to [Evaluative] is recommended.
Even though the firing of the built-in flash is disabled when
[EasyWireless] is set, it will still fire a small flash to control the slave unit.
Depending on shooting conditions, the flash fired to control the slave unit
may appear in the picture.
Firing a test flash is not possible with the slave unit.
COPY
233
Easy Wireless Flash Shooting
You can have multiple slave units fire as if they were a single Speedlite.
This is convenient when you need a large flash output.
Basic settings:
Flash mode : E-TTL II
E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative
Built-in flash : EasyWireless
Channel : (Same as slave units)
All the slave units will fire at the same
output and be controlled to obtain a
standard exposure.
No matter what the slave ID is (A, B, or
C), all the slave units will fire as one
group.
If the flash exposure looks too dark or too bright, you can set flash
exposure compensation to adjust the slave units’ flash output.
Select [Flash exposure
compensation], then press <0>.
If the flash exposure is too dark, press the
<
Z
> key to increase the flash exposure
and make it brighter. If the flash exposure is
too bright, press the <
Y
> key to decrease
the flash exposure and make it darker.
Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites
Flash Exposure Compensation
COPY
234
This section describes fully automatic
wireless flash shooting with one external
Speedlite and the built-in flash.
You can change the flash ratio between
the external Speedlite and built-in flash
to adjust how the shadows look on the
subject.
On the menu screens, the <0> and
<1> icons refer to the external
Speedlite, and the <3> and <2>
icons refer to the built-in flash.
1Select [CustWireless].
Follow step 5 on page 232 to select
[CustWireless], then press <0>.
2Select [Wireless func.].
Under [Wireless func.], select
[0:3], then press <0>.
3Set the desired flash ratio and
take the picture.
Select [0:3] and set the flash ratio
within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio
to the right of 1:1 is not possible.
If the built-in flash output is not enough,
set a higher ISO speed (p.92).
Custom Wireless Flash Shooting
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite
and Built-in Flash
The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop increments).
COPY
235
Custom Wireless Flash Shooting
Multiple Speedlite slave units can be treated as one flash unit or
separated into slave groups whose flash ratio can be set.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple
Speedlites.
Basic settings:
Flash mode : E-TTL II
E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative
Wireless func. :0
Channel : (Same as slave units)
[1All] Using multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit
This is convenient when you need a
large flash output. All the slave units will
fire at the same output and be controlled
to obtain a standard exposure.
No matter what the slave ID is (A, B, or
C), all the slave units will fire as one
group.
Set [Firing group] to [1All], then
take the picture.
Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites
COPY
236
Custom Wireless Flash Shooting
[1 (A:B)] Multiple slave units in multiple groups
Divide the slave units into groups A and
B and change the flash ratio to obtain
the desired lighting effect.
Refer to your Speedlite’s instruction
manual to set one slave unit’s slave ID
to A (Group A) and the other slave unit’s
ID to B (Group B), and position them as
shown in the illustration.
1Select [Wireless func.].
Follow step 2 on page 234 to select
[0], then press <0>.
2Set [Firing group] to [1 (A:B)].
3Set the desired flash ratio and
take the picture.
Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the
flash ratio.
A B
If [Firing group] is set to [1 (A:B)], group C will not fire.
The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2-
stop increments).
COPY
237
Custom Wireless Flash Shooting
The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained
on pages 235-236.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple
Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.
1Basic settings:
Flash mode : E-TTL II
E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative
Wireless func. : [0+3]
Channel : (Same as slave units)
2Select [Firing group].
Select the firing group, then set the
flash ratio, flash exposure
compensation, and other necessary
settings before shooting.
Fully Automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and
Multiple External Speedlites
A B
[1 (A:B) 2][1All and 2]
COPY
238
When [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], flash exposure compensation
can be set. The flash exposure compensation settings (see below)
which can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless func.] and
[Firing group] settings.
[Flash exp. comp.]
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to the built-in flash and all
external Speedlites.
[2 exp. comp.]
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to the built-in flash.
[1 exp. comp.]
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to all external Speedlites.
If [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], you can press the <A> button to
perform FE lock.
Other Settings
Flash Exposure Compensation
FE Lock
COPY
239
Other Settings
When [Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash], flash exposure can be set
manually. The flash output settings ([1 flash output], [Group A
output], etc.) that can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless
func.] setting (see below).
[Wireless func.0]
[Firing group: 1All]: The manual
flash output setting will be applied to
all the external Speedlites.
[Firing group: 1 (A:B)]: You can set
the flash output separately for slave
groups A and B.
[Wireless func.0+3]
[Firing group: 1All and 2]: The
flash output can be set separately for
the external Speedlite(s) and built-in
flash.
[Firing group: 1 (A:B)2]: You can
set the flash output separately for
slave groups A and B. You can also
set the flash output for the built-in
flash.
Setting the Flash Output Manually for
Wireless Flash Shooting
COPY
240
COPY
241
Image Playback
This chapter explains functions related to viewing
photos and movies, with more detail than in Chapter 2
“Basic Shooting and Image Playback”. Here you will
find explanations of how to play back and erase photos
and movies with the camera and view them on a TV set.
About images shot and saved with another device
The camera may not be able to properly display images captured
with a different camera, edited with a computer, or had their file
names changed.
COPY
242
Search for images quickly with the index display showing four or nine
images on one screen.
1Play back the image.
When you press the <x> button, the
last image captured will be displayed.
2Switch to the index display.
Press the <Hy> button.
XThe 4-image index display will
appear. The currently-selected image
will be highlighted in a blue frame.
Press the <Hy> button again to
switch to the 9-image index display.
Pressing the <u> button will switch
the display from 9 images to 4 images
and then to 1 image.
3Select an image.
Press the <S> key to move the blue
frame to select an image.
Turning the <6> dial will display the
next screen or previous image.
Press <0> and the selected image
will be displayed as a single image.
x Searching for Images Quickly
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)
BB
COPY
243
x Searching for Images Quickly
With the single-image display, you can turn the <
6
> dial to jump through
the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
1Select [Image jump w/6].
Under the [x2] tab, select [Image
jump w/6], then press <0>.
2Select the jump method.
Press the <S> key to select the
jump method, then press <0>.
d:Display images one by one
e:Jump 10 images
f:Jump 100 images
g:Display by date
h:Display by folder
i:Display movies only
j:Display stills only
k:Display by image rating (p.248)
Turn the <6> dial to select.
3Browse by jumping.
Press the <x> button to play back
images.
On the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
I Jump through Images (Jump Display)
Playback position
Jump method
To search images according to the shooting date, select [Date].
To search images according to folder, select [Folder].
If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or
[Stills] to display only either ones.
If no images match the selected [Rating], you cannot browse through the
images with the <6> dial.
COPY
244
You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD
monitor.
1Magnify the image.
Press the <u> button during image
playback.
XThe image will be magnified.
If you hold down the <u> button, the
image will be magnified until it
reaches the maximum magnification.
Press the <Hy> button to reduce
the magnification. If you hold down
the button, the magnification will be
reduced to the single-image display.
2Scroll around the image.
Use the <S> key to scroll around the
magnified image.
To exit the magnified display, press
the <x> button and the single-
image display will return.
u/y Magnified View
Magnified area position
In magnified view, you can turn the <6> dial to view another image at
the same magnification.
The image cannot be magnified during the image review immediately
after shooting.
A movie cannot be magnified.
COPY
245
The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can touch with your
fingers for playback operations. Press the <x> button to play back
images.
Swipe with one finger.
With the single-image display, use
one finger to swipe the image to the
left or right to see another image.
Swipe to the left to see the next
(newer) image or swipe to the right to
see the previous (older) image.
With the index display, use one
finger to scroll up or down the screen
to display another screen of index
images. Swipe your finger up to see
newer images or swipe your finger
down to see the older images. When
you select an image and tap it, it will
be displayed as a single image.
Swipe with two fingers.
When you use two fingers to swipe left
or right on the screen, you can jump
through images with the method set in
[Image jump w/6] under the [x2]
tab.
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen
Browsing Images
Jump through Images (Jump Display)
COPY
246
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen
Pinch two fingers.
Touch the screen with two fingers spread
apart, and pinch your fingers together on
the screen.
Each time you pinch your fingers, the
screen changes from a single-image
display to a 4-image index display
and 9-image index display. Spreading
two fingers on the screen will reverse
this operation.
The selected image is highlighted in a
blue frame. When you tap the
selected image, it will be displayed as
a single image.
Spread two fingers apart.
Touch the screen with two fingers
together, then spread your fingers apart
on the screen.
As you spread your fingers, the
image will be magnified.
The image can be magnified up to 10x.
You can scroll around the image by
swiping your finger.
To reduce the image, pinch your
fingers together on the screen.
Tapping the [2] icon will return to the
single-image display.
Reduce Image (Index Display)
Magnify Image
Touch screen operations explained on pages 245 - 246 are also possible
while viewing images on a TV set connected to your camera (p.262, 265).
COPY
247
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
1Select [Rotate image].
Under the [x1] tab, select [Rotate
image], then press <0>.
2Select an image.
Press the <U> key to select the
image to be rotated.
You can also select an image on the
index display (p.242).
3Rotate the image.
Each time you press <0>, the
image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90° → 270° → 0°.
To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
To exit and return to the menu, press
the <M> button.
b Rotating the Image
If you have set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.212) before taking
vertical shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.
If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
A movie cannot be rotated.
COPY
248
You can rate images and movies with one of five rating marks: l/m/
n/o/p. This function is called rating.
1Select [Rating].
Under the [x2] tab, select [Rating],
then press <0>.
2Select an image or movie.
Press the <U> key to select an
image or movie to be rated.
You can display three images by
pressing the <Hy> button. To
return to the single-image display,
press the <u> button.
3Rate the image or movie.
Press the <V> key to select a
rating.
XThe total number of images and
movies rated will be counted for each
rating.
To rate another image or movie,
repeat steps 2 and 3.
Press the <M> button to return to
the menu.
3 Setting Ratings
COPY
249
3 Setting Ratings
The total number of images with a given rating that can be displayed is 999.
If there are more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be displayed
for that rating.
Taking Advantage of Ratings
With [x2: Image jump w/6], you can display only images and
movies with a specific rating.
With [x2: Slide show], you can play back only images and movies with
a specific rating.
With Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.364), you can
select only images and movies with a specific rating (still photos only).
With Windows 7 or Windows Vista, etc., you can see each file’s rating as
part of the file information display or in the provided image viewer (still
photos only).
COPY
250
During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set any of the
following: [ : Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9: Rating], [U:
Creative filters], [S: Resize (JPEG images only)], and [e: Image
jump w/6].
For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.
1Press the <Q> button.
During image playback, press the
<Q> button.
XThe Quick Control screen will appear.
2Select a function and set it.
Press the <V> key to select a
function.
XThe name and current setting of the
selected function are displayed at the
bottom of the screen.
Set it by pressing the <U> key.
For Creative filters and Resize, press
<0> and set the function. For
details, see page 274 for Creative
filters and page 277 for Resize. To
cancel, press the <M> button.
3Exit the setting.
Press the <Q> button to exit the
Quick Control screen.
Q Quick Control During Playback
COPY
251
Q Quick Control During Playback
To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD]. If [51: Auto rotate]
is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to
the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.
Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the
single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing
the <Q> button again will return to the index display.
For images taken with another camera, the functions you can select may
be limited.
COPY
252
You can play back movies in the following three ways:
Use the stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately) or HDMI cable HTC-
100 (sold separately) to connect the
camera to a TV set. Then you can play
back captured movies and still photos on
the TV.
If you have a High-Definition TV set and
connect your camera with an HDMI
cable, you can watch Full High-Definition
(Full HD: 1920x1080) and High-
Definition (HD: 1280x720) movies with
higher image quality.
You can play back movies on the
camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit
out the movie’s first and last scenes, and
play back the still photos and movies on
the card in an automatic slide show.
k Enjoying Movies
Playback on a TV set (p.262, 265)
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor (p.254-261)
Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera
cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.
Even if you connect the camera to a hard disk recorder with a cable, you
cannot play or save movies and images.
If the playback device is not compatible with MOV files, the movie cannot
be played.
A movie edited with a personal computer cannot be rewritten to the card and
played back with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with
EOS Video Snapshot Task (p.195) can be played on the camera.
COPY
253
k Enjoying Movies
The movie files recorded on the card can
be transferred to a personal computer
and played with ImageBrowser EX
(provided software).
Playback and Editing with a Personal Computer (p.364)
To have the movie play back smoothly on a personal computer, use a
high-performance personal computer. Regarding the computer hardware
requirements for ImageBrowser EX, refer to the PDF file ImageBrowser
EX User Guide.
If you want to use commercially-available software to play back or edit
the movies, make sure it is compatible with MOV files. For details on
commercially-available software, contact the software manufacturer.
COPY
254
1Play back the image.
Press the <x> button to display
images.
2Select a movie.
Press the
<U>
key to select a movie.
On the single-image display, the
<s1> icon displayed on the
upper left indicates a movie. If the
movie is a video snapshot, < >
will be displayed.
You can press the <B> button to
switch to the shooting information
display (p.271).
In the index display, perforations at the
left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie.
As movies cannot be played
on the index display, press
<0>
to
switch to the single-image display.
3In the single-image display, press
<0>.
XThe movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.
4Play back the movie.
Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.
XThe movie will start playing.
You can pause the movie playback by
pressing <0>.
During movie playback, you can turn
the <6> dial to adjust the built-in
speaker’s sound volume.
For more details on the playback
procedure, see the next page.
k Playing Movies
Speaker
The camera might not be able to play movies shot by another camera.
COPY
255
k Playing Movies
Movie Playback Panel
* When background music is set, the movie’s sound will not be played.
Tap [
7
] at the center of the screen.
XThe movie will start playing.
To display the movie playback panel,
tap <s1> on the upper left of the
screen.
To pause the movie while it is playing,
tap the screen. The movie playback
panel will also appear.
Operation Playback Description
7 Play Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.
8 Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the <
U
> key. The
slow-motion speed is indicated at the upper right of the screen.
5 First frame Displays the movie’s first frame.
3 Previous
frame
Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is displayed.
If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-
frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the movie.
4 Last frame Displays the movie’s last frame.
Background
music*
Play back a movie with the selected background music
(p.261).
X Edit Displays the editing screen (p.256).
Play back position
mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)
9 Volume You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.254) volume by
turning the <6> dial.
32
Pressing the <
M
> button returns to the single-image display.
Playback with the Touch Screen
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, the continuous playback time
at 23°C/73°F will be as follows: approx. 2 hr. 30 min.
If you took a still photo while you shot the movie, the still photo will be
displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.
COPY
256
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie (except video
snapshots) in 1-sec. increments.
1On the movie playback screen,
select [X].
XThe editing screen will be displayed.
2Specify the part to be edited out.
Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
Press the <U> key to see the
previous or next frames. Holding it
down will fast forward the frames.
After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion highlighted
in blue on the top of the screen is
what will remain.
3Check the edited movie.
Select [7] and press <0> to play
back the portion highlighted in blue.
To change the editing, go back to step
2.
To cancel the editing, press the
<M> button, select [OK] on the
confirmation screen, then press
<0>.
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
COPY
257
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
4Save the edited movie.
Select [W], then press <0>.
XThe save screen will appear.
To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite]. Then press <0>.
On the confirmation screen, select
[OK], then press <0> to save the
edited movie and return to the movie
playback screen.
Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position
indicated by [ ]), the exact position where the movie is edited may differ
slightly from the position you specified.
If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
When the battery level is low, editing the movie is not possible. Use a
fully-charged battery.
COPY
258
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
1Select [Slide show].
Under the [x2] tab, select [Slide
show], then press <0>.
2Select the images to be played.
Press the <V> key to select the
desired option, then press <0>.
[All images/Movies/Stills]
Press the <V> key to select one of
the following: [jAll images/
kMovies/zStills]. Then press
<0>.
[Date/Folder/Rating]
Press the <V> key to select one of
the following: [iDate/nFolder/
9Rating].
When <zH> is highlighted,
press the <B> button.
Press the <V> key to select the
desired option, then press <0>.
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Number of images to be played
[Date][Folder][Rating]
COPY
259
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
3Set [Set up] as desired.
Press the <V> key to select [Set
up], then press <0>.
Set the [Display time], [Repeat],
[Transition effect], and
[Background music] for the still
photos.
The background music selection
procedure is explained on page 261.
After selecting the settings, press the
<M> button.
Item Playback Description
jAll images All the still photos and movies on the card will be played back.
iDate Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date will
be played back.
nFolder Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played
back.
kMovies Only the movies on the card will be played back.
zStills Only the still photos on the card will be played back.
9Rating Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will be
played back.
[Display time][Repeat]
COPY
260
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
4Start the slide show.
Press the <V> key to select [Start],
then press <0>.
XAfter [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
5Quit the slide show.
To quit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the <M>
button.
[Transition effect] [Background music]
To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume
the slide show. You can also pause the slide show by tapping the screen.
During auto playback, you can press the <B> button to change the
still photo display format (p.84).
During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
During auto playback or pause, you can press the <U> key to view
another image.
During auto playback, auto power off will not work.
The display time may vary depending on the image.
To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 262.
COPY
261
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
1Select [Background music].
Set [Background music] to [On],
then press <0>.
2Select the background music.
Press the <V> key to select the
desired background music, then
press <0>. You can also select
multiple background music tracks.
3Play the background music.
To listen to a sample of the
background music, press the <B>
button.
Press the <V> key to play another
background music track. To stop
listening to the background music,
press the <B> button again.
Adjust the sound volume by turning
the <6> dial.
To delete a background music track,
press the <V> key and select the
track, then press the <L> button.
Selecting the Background Music
At the time of purchase, you cannot select background music with the
camera. You must first use EOS Utility (provided software) to copy the
background music to the card. For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction
Manual on the CD-ROM.
COPY
262
You can view the still photos and movies on a TV set.
HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is required.
1Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the <D> terminal.
2Connect the HDMI cable to the TV
set.
Connect the HDMI cable to the TV’s
HDMI IN port.
3Turn on the TV and switch the
TV’s video input to select the
connected port.
4Set the camera’s power switch to
<1>.
Viewing the Images on TV
Viewing on High-Definition (HD) TV Sets (Connected with HDMI)
Adjust the movie’s sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume
cannot be adjusted with the camera.
Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
television, turn off the camera and TV set.
Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
COPY
263
Viewing the Images on TV
5Press the <x> button.
XThe image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
The images will automatically be
displayed at the TV’s optimum
resolution.
By pressing the <B> button, you
can change the display format.
To play back movies, see page 254.
If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible
with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback
operations.
* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that
you can control them with one remote control unit.
1Set [Ctrl over HDMI] to [Enable].
Under the [x2] tab, select [Ctrl over
HDMI], then press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
Using HDMI CEC TV Sets
The images cannot be output at the same time from both the <D>
and <q > terminals.
Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Certain TVs may not be able to play back the captured images. In such a
case, use the stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) to
connect to the TV.
COPY
264
Viewing the Images on TV
2Connect the camera to a TV set.
Use an HDMI cable to connect the
camera to the TV.
XThe TV’s input will switch
automatically to the HDMI port
connected to the camera.
3Press the camera’s <x> button.
XAn image will appear on the TV
screen and you can use the TV’s
remote control to play back images.
4Select an image.
Point the remote control toward the
TV set and press the / button to
select an image.
5
Press the remote control’s Enter button.
XThe menu appears and you can
perform the playback operations
shown on the left.
Press the
/
button to select the
desired option, then press the Enter
button. For a slide show, press the
remote control’s
/
button to select
an option, then press the Enter button.
If you select [Return] and press the
Enter button, the menu will disappear
and you can use the / button to
select an image.
Still photo playback menu
Movie playback menu
Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For
details, refer to the TV set’s instruction manual.
Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not
operate properly. In such a case, disconnect the HDMI cable, set [x2:
Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable], and use the camera to control the
playback operation.
: Return
: 9-image index
: Play movie
: Slide show
: Disp. shooting info
: Rotate
COPY
265
Viewing the Images on TV
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) is required.
1Connect the AV cable to the
camera.
With the plug’s <Canon> logo facing
the back of the camera, insert it into
the <q
> terminal.
2Connect the AV cable to the TV
set.
Connect the AV cable to the TV’s
video IN terminal and audio IN
terminal.
3Turn on the TV and switch the
TV’s video input to select the
connected port.
4Set the camera’s power switch to
<1>.
5Press the <x> button.
XThe image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
To play back movies, see page 254.
Viewing on Non-HD TV Sets (Connected with AV Cable)
AUDIO
VIDEO
(Red)
(White)
(Yellow)
Do not use any AV cable other than the Stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately). Images may not be displayed if you use a different
cable.
If the video system format does not match the TV’s, the images will not
be displayed properly. If this happens, switch to the proper video system
format with [52: Video system].
COPY
266
Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally.
1Select [Protect images].
Under the [x1] tab, select [Protect
images], then press <0>.
XThe protect setting screen will
appear.
2Select [Select images].
Select [Select images], then press
<0>.
XThe images will be displayed.
3Protect the image.
Press the <U> key to select the
image to be protected, then press
<0>.
XWhen an image is protected, the
<K> icon will appear on the top of
the screen.
To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
To protect another image, repeat step
3.
Press the <M> button to return to
the menu.
K Protecting Images
3 Protecting a Single Image
Image protect icon
COPY
267
K Protecting Images
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at one time.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [x1: Protect
images], all the images in the folder or
on the card will be protected.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].
3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
If you format the card (p.48), the protected images will also be erased.
Movies can also be protected.
Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
If you erase all the images (p.269), only the protected images will
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images
all at once.
COPY
268
You can either select and erase images one by one or erase them in
one batch. Protected images (p.266) will not be erased.
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure
you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent
important images from being erased accidentally, protect
them. Erasing a 1+73 image will erase both the RAW and
JPEG images.
1Play back the image to be erased.
2Press the <L> button.
XThe Erase menu will appear at the
bottom of the screen.
3Erase the image.
Select [Erase], then press <0>. The
image displayed will be erased.
By appending checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can
erase multiple images at one time.
1Select [Erase images].
Under the [x1] tab, select [Erase
images], then press <0>.
L Erasing Images
Erasing a Single Image
3 Checkmarking <X> Images to be Erased in a Batch
COPY
269
L Erasing Images
2Select [Select and erase images].
Select [Select and erase images],
then press <0>.
XThe images will be displayed.
To display the three-image display,
press the <Hy> button. To return to
the single-image display, press the
<u> button.
3Select the images to be erased.
Press the <U> key to select the
image to be erased, then press
<0>.
XA checkmark <X> will be displayed
on the upper left of the screen.
To select other images to be erased,
repeat step 3.
4Erase the image.
Press the <L> button.
Select [OK], then press <0>.
XThe selected images will be erased.
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at one time. When
[x1: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on
card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
To also erase protected images, format the card (p.48).
COPY
270
* With 1+73 images, the 1 file size is displayed.
* For still photos taken during movie shooting, <G> will be displayed.
* If a Creative filter or Resize has been applied to the image, the <u> icon will be
displayed.
* Photos taken with flash without any flash exposure compensation are marked
with the < > icon. Photos taken with flash exposure compensation are marked
with the <y> icon.
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Image Taken in a Creative Zone Mode
Flash exposure compensation
amount
Metering mode
Shooting mode
Highlight tone priority
Shooting date and time
White balance correction
Histogram
(Brightness/RGB)
Color space
White balance
Picture Style/Settings
File size
Image-recording
quality
Playback
number/
Total images
recorded
Folder number - File number
Rating
Aperture
Shutter speed
Protect images
Exposure compensation amount
ISO speed
Eye-Fi transfer
COPY
271
B: Shooting Information Display
* With images taken in a Basic Zone mode, the information displayed will differ
depending on the shooting mode.
* Photos taken in the <C> mode will show [Background blur].
* If manual exposure was used, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed
(when set manually) will be displayed.
* The < > icon will be displayed for video snapshots.
Sample Image Taken in a Basic Zone Mode
Sample Movie
Ambience effect
Lighting or scene
Shooting mode Ambience
Shooting mode
Movie file size
Shutter speed
Frame rate
Movie recording
size
Shooting time
Playback
Aperture
COPY
272
B: Shooting Information Display
About the Highlight Alert
When the shooting information is displayed, any overexposed areas of the
image will blink. To obtain more image detail in the overexposed areas, set
the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again.
About the Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and overall
brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color saturation and
gradation. The display can be switched with
[x2: Histogram disp]
.
[Brightness] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of
the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis
indicates the brightness level (darker on the left and
brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates
how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The
more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the
image. The more pixels there are toward the right, the
brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on the
left, the shadow detail will be lost. If there are too many
pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be lost. The
gradation in-between will be reproduced. By checking
the image and its brightness histogram, you can see
the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.
[RGB] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).
The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on
the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how
many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels
there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The
more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the
color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the respective color
information will be lacking. If there are too many pixels on the right,
the color will be too saturated with no gradation. By checking the
image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation and
gradation condition, as well as white balance inclination.
Sample Histograms
Dark image
Normal brightness
Bright image
COPY
273
Post-Processing
Images
After shooting, you can apply Creative filters or resize
the images (downsize the pixel count).
The camera may not be able to process images taken with
another camera.
Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be
performed while the camera is connected to a personal
computer via the <C> terminal.
COPY
274
You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a
new image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect.
1Select [Creative filters].
Under the [x1] tab, select [Creative
filters], then press <0>.
XThe images will be displayed.
2Select an image.
Select the image you want to apply a
filter to.
By pressing the <Hy> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
3Select a filter.
When you press <0>, the types of
Creative filters will be displayed.
For details on Creative filter
characteristics, see pages 275, 276.
Press the <U> key to select a filter,
then press <0>.
XThe image will be displayed with the
corresponding filter applied.
4Adjust the filter effect.
Press the <U> key to adjust the
filter effect, then press <0>.
For the Miniature effect, press the
<V> key and select the image area
(within the white frame) where you
want the image to look sharp. Then
press <0>.
U Applying Creative Filters to the Image
COPY
275
U Applying Creative Filters to the Image
5Save the image.
Select [OK] to save the image.
Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
To apply a filter to another image,
repeat steps 2 to 5.
Press the <M> button to return to
the menu.
Grainy B/W
Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the
contrast, you can change the black-and-white effect.
Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change
the degree of softness.
Creative Filter Characteristics
When shooting 1+73 or 1 images, the Creative filter will be applied to
the 1 image and the image will be saved as a JPEG image. If an aspect
ratio is set for Live View shooting and a Creative filter is applied to the 1
image, the image will be saved in the aspect ratio that was set.
COPY
276
U Applying Creative Filters to the Image
Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along
the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter effect will
magnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may
degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. Set the filter
effect in step 4 while checking the resulting image.
Art bold effect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look three-
dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note that
the sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendered with a
smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.
Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can adjust the color density. Note that night scenes or dark scenes
may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular
or have significant noise.
Toy camera effect
Gives a color cast typical of toy cameras and darkens the image’s
four corners. By adjusting the color tone, you can change the color
cast.
Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks
sharp. In step 4, you can press the <B> button (or tap [ ] on the
screen) to change the white frame’s orientation (horizontal/vertical)
where you want the image to look sharp.
COPY
277
You can resize an image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a
new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3/4/a/b
images. JPEG c and 1 images cannot be resized.
1Select [Resize].
Under the [x1] tab, select [Resize],
then press <0>.
XThe images will be displayed.
2Select an image.
Select the image you want to resize.
By pressing the <Hy> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
3Select the desired image size.
Press <0> to display the image
sizes.
Press the <U> key to select the
desired image size, then press <0>.
4Save the image.
Select [OK] to save the resized
image.
Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
To resize another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
Press the <M> button to return to
the menu.
S Resizing a JPEG Image
Target sizes
COPY
278
S Resizing a JPEG Image
Resize Options According to Original Image Size
The image size displayed in step 3 on the preceding page, such as
[***M ****x****], has a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image size according to
aspect ratios is shown in the table below.
The asterisked image-recording quality figures do not exactly match the
aspect ratio. The image will be cropped slightly.
Original Image
Size
Available Resize Settings
4a b c
3kkkk
4kkk
akk
bk
c
About Image Sizes
Image
Quality
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)
3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1
43456x2304
(8.0 megapixels)
3072x2304
(7.0 megapixels)
3456x1944
(6.7 megapixels)
2304x2304
(5.3 megapixels)
a2592x1728
(4.5 megapixels)
2304x1728
(4.0 megapixels)
2592x1456*
(3.8 megapixels)
1728x1728
(3.0 megapixels)
b1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
1696x1280*
(2.2 megapixels)
1920x1080
(2.1 megapixels)
1280x1280
(1.6 megapixels)
c720x480
(350,000 pixels)
640x480
(310,000 pixels)
720x400*
(290,000 pixels)
480x480
(230,000 pixels)
COPY
279
Printing Images
Printing (p.280)
You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print
out the images on the card. The camera is compatible with
“wPictBridge” which is the standard for direct printing.
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.289)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print
images recorded on the card according to your printing
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the
print order to a photofinisher.
Specifying Images for a Photobook (p.293)
You can specify images in the card for printing in a
photobook.
COPY
280
The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the
camera while you look at the LCD monitor.
1Set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
2Set up the printer.
For details, see the printer’s
instruction manual.
3Connect the camera to the
printer.
Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
Connect the cable to the camera’s
<C> terminal with the cable
plug’s <D> icon facing the front of
the camera.
To connect to the printer, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
4Turn on the printer.
5Set the camera’s power switch to
<1>.
XSome printers may make a beeping
sound.
Preparing to Print
Connecting the Camera to a Printer
COPY
281
Preparing to Print
6Play back the image.
Press the <x> button.
XThe image will appear, and the <w>
icon will appear on the upper left to
indicate that the camera is connected
to a printer.
w
PictBridge
Before using the printer, make sure it has a PictBridge connection port.
Movies cannot be printed.
The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct
or Bubble Jet Direct.
Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.
If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the
printer. Resolve the problem displayed in the error message (p.288).
Printing is not possible if the <
F
> or <
G
> shooting mode or Multi Shot
Noise Reduction has been set.
You can also print 1 images taken with this camera.
If you use a battery pack to power the camera, make sure it is fully
charged. With a fully-charged battery, printing up to approx. 3 hr. 30 min
is possible.
Before disconnecting the cable, first turn off the camera and printer. Hold
the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.
For direct printing, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately) to
power the camera is recommended.
COPY
282
The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the
printer. Some settings may not be available. For details, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
1Select the image to be printed.
Check that the <w> icon is
displayed on the upper left of the LCD
monitor.
Press the <U> key to select the
image to be printed.
2
Press <
0
>.
XThe print setting screen will appear.
3Select [Paper settings].
Select [Paper settings], then press
<0>.
XThe paper settings screen will
appear.
wPrinting
Printer-connected icon
Print setting screen
* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file
number imprinting and cropping may not be selectable.
Sets the printing effects (p.284).
Sets the date or file number imprinting to on
or off.
Sets the quantity to be printed.
Sets the cropping (trimming) (p.287).
Sets the paper size, type, and layout.
Returns to the screen in step 1.
Starts the printing.
The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.
COPY
283
wPrinting
Select the size of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
XThe paper type screen will appear.
Select the type of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
XThe page layout screen will appear.
Select the page layout, then press
<0>.
XThe print settings screen will
reappear.
*1:
From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture,
exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance, etc., will be imprinted.
*2: After ordering the prints with “Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)” (p.289), it is
recommended that you print by following “Direct Printing with DPOF” (p.292).
Q Setting the Paper Size
Y Setting the Paper Type
U Setting the Page Layout
Bordered The print will have white borders along the edges.
Borderless The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot print
borderless prints, the print will have borders.
BorderedcThe shooting information*1 will be imprinted on the border on
9x13 cm and larger prints.
xx-up Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.
20-upc
35-upp
20 or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size
paper*2.
• [20-upc] will have the shooting information*1 imprinted.
Default
The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings.
If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect ratio, the
image may be cropped significantly if you print it as a borderless print. If the image is
cropped, it may look more grainy on the paper due to the fewer number of pixels.
COPY
wPrinting
284
4Set the printing effects (image
optimization).
Set them if necessary. If you do not
need to set any printing effects, go to
step 5.
What is displayed on the screen
differs depending on the printer.
Select the option, then press <0>.
Select the desired printing effect, then
press <0>.
If the <e> icon is displayed brightly
next to <z>, you can also adjust
the printing effect (p.286).
*When you change the printing effects, changes are reflected in the image
displayed on the upper left. Note that the printed image may look slightly
different from the displayed image, which is only an approximation. This also
applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 286.
Printing Effect Description
EOn The image will be printed using the printer’s standard colors.
The image’s Exif data is used to make automatic corrections.
EOff No automatic correction will be applied.
EVivid The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce
more vivid blues and greens.
ENR Image noise is reduced before printing.
0 B/W Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.
0 Cool tone Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.
0 Warm tone Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.
zNatural Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No
automatic color adjustments are applied.
zNatural M
The printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural”
setting. However, this setting enables finer printing
adjustments than with “Natural.”
EDefault The printing will differ depending on the printer. For details,
refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
COPY
285
wPrinting
5Set the date and file number
imprinting.
Set them if necessary.
Select <I>, then press <0>.
Set as desired, then press <0>.
6Set the number of copies.
Set it if necessary.
Select <R>, then press <0>.
Set the number of copies, then press
<0>.
7Start printing.
Select [Print], then press <0>.
With Easy printing, you can print another image using the same settings.
Just select the image and press the <l> button. With Easy printing, the
number of copies will always be 1. (You cannot set the number of
copies.) Also, any cropping (p.287) will not be applied.
The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the
printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer
to the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings
are.
Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may
take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].
If image tilt correction (p.287) is applied, it may take longer to print the
image.
To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select
[OK].
If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.214), all the settings will
revert to their defaults.
COPY
wPrinting
286
In step 4 on page 284, select the printing
effect. When the <e> icon is displayed
brightly next to <z>, you can press
the <B> button. You can then adjust
the printing effect. What can be adjusted
or what is displayed will depend on the
selection made in step 4.
Brightness
The image brightness can be adjusted.
Adjust levels
When you select [Manual], you can change
the histogram’s distribution and adjust the
image’s brightness and contrast.
With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press
the <B> button to change the position of
the <h>. Press the <U> key to freely adjust
the shadow level (0-127) or highlight level (128-255).
kBrightener
Effective in backlit conditions that can make the subject’s face look
dark. When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.
Red-eye corr.
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye. When [On]
is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.
e Adjustment of Printing Effects
The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not be reflected on
the screen.
When you select [
Detail set.
], you can adjust the [
Contrast
], [
Saturation
],
[
Color tone
], and [
Color balance
]. To adjust the [
Color balance
], use the
<
S
> keys. B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for green.
The image’s color balance will be corrected towards the selected color.
If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to
their defaults.
COPY
287
wPrinting
You can crop the image and print only
the cropped portion as if the image was
recomposed.
Set the cropping right before printing.
If you set the cropping and then set the
print settings, you may have to set the
cropping again before printing.
1 On the print settings screen, select [Cropping].
2 Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.
The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The
cropping frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with
[Paper settings].
Changing the cropping frame size
When you press the <u> or <Hy> button, the size of the
cropping frame will change. The smaller the cropping frame, the
larger the image magnification will be for printing.
Moving the cropping frame
Press the <
S
> key to move the frame over the image vertically or
horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area.
Rotating the frame
Pressing the <B> button will toggle the cropping frame
between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you
to create a vertically oriented print from a horizontal image.
Image tilt correction
By turning the <6> dial, you can adjust the image tilt angle up to
±10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the
image tilt, the <O> icon on the screen will turn blue.
3 Press <0> to exit the cropping.
XThe print settings screen will reappear.
You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the
print settings screen.
Cropping the Image
Tilt correction
COPY
wPrinting
288
Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as
you specified.
The smaller you make the cropping frame, the grainier the picture will
look in the print.
While cropping the image, look at the camera’s LCD monitor. If you look
at the image on a TV screen, the cropping frame may not be displayed
accurately.
Handling Printer Errors
If you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper, etc.) and select [Continue] to
resume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons on the printer to
resume printing. For details on resuming the printing, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
Error Messages
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the
camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to stop printing. After fixing the
problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer
to the printer’s instruction manual.
Paper Error
Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.
Ink Error
Check the printer’s ink level, and check the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a
different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable.
COPY
289
You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file number imprinting.
The print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They
cannot be set individually for each image.)
1Select [Print order].
Under the [x1] tab, select [Print
order], then press <0>.
2Select [Set up].
Select [Set up], then press <0>.
3Set the options as desired.
Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
Select the option to be set, then press
<0>. Select the desired setting,
then press <0>.
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Setting the Printing Options
[Print type][Date][File No.]
COPY
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
290
4Exit the setting.
Press the <7> button.
XThe print order screen will reappear.
Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or
[All image] to order the images to be
printed.
Print type
KStandard Prints one image on one sheet.
LIndex
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one sheet.
K
LBoth Prints both the standard and index prints.
Date On [On] imprints the recorded date on the print.
Off
File number On [On] imprints the file number on the print.
Off
Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may
not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.
With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]
at the same time.
When printing with DPOF, you must use the card whose print order
specifications have been set. It will not work if you just extract images
from the card and try to print them.
Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to
print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction
manual before printing. Or check with your photofinisher about
compatibility when ordering prints.
Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a
different camera and then try to specify a print order. The print order may
be overwritten. Also, depending on the image type, the print order may
not be possible.
1 images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print 1 images
through direct printing (p.292).
COPY
291
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Sel.Image
Select and order images one by one.
To display the three-image display, press
the <Hy> button. To return to the
single-image display, press the <u>
button.
Press the <M> button to save the
print order to the card.
[Standard] [Both]
Press the <V> key to set the number of
copies to be printed for the displayed
image.
[Index]
Press <0> to add a checkmark to the
box <X>. The image will be included in
the index print.
Byn
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be placed. If you select [Clear
all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for that folder will
all be canceled.
All image
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print
order will be cleared for all the images on the card.
Print Ordering
Quantity
Total images selected
Index icon
Checkmark
Note that 1 images and movies will not be included in the print order
even if you set “Byn” or “All image”.
When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one
print order. If you specify more than this, all the images may not be
printed.
COPY
292
With a PictBridge printer, you can easily
print images with DPOF.
1Prepare to print.
See page 280. Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer”
procedure up to step 5.
2Under the [x1] tab, select [Print order].
3Select [Print].
[Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a
printer and printing is possible.
4Set the [Paper settings] (p.282).
Set the printing effects (p.284) if necessary.
5Select [OK].
W Direct Printing with DPOF
Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
Certain printers cannot imprint the file number.
If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a
bright background or on the border.
Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.
If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining
images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if you stop
the printing and any of the following occurs:
• Before resuming the printing, you changed the print order or deleted
print-ordered images.
• When you set the index, you changed the paper setting before
resuming the printing.
• When you paused the printing, the card’s remaining capacity was low.
If a problem occurs during printing, see page 288.
COPY
293
When you select images (up to 998 images) to be used for a photobook
and transfer them from the camera to a computer using EOS Utility
(provided software), the images will be copied to a dedicated folder.
This function is convenient when you order a photobook from the
Internet.
1Select [Photobook Set-up].
Under the [x1] tab, select
[Photobook Set-up], then press
<0>.
2Select [Select images].
Select [Select images], then press
<0>.
XThe images will be displayed.
To display the three-image display,
press the <Hy> button. To return to
the single-image display, press the
<u> button.
3Select the image to be specified.
Press the <U> key to select the
image to be specified, then press
<0>.
Repeat this step to select another
image. The number of images which
have been specified will be displayed
on the screen’s upper left.
To cancel the specified image, press
<0> again.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
Specify One Image at a Time
COPY
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
294
You can specify all the images in a folder or card at one time.
When [x1: Photobook Set-up] is set
to [All images in folder] or [All images
on card], all the images in the folder or
on the card will be specified.
To cancel the image specification, select
[Clear all in folder] or [Clear all on
card].
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
1 images and movies cannot be specified.
Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another camera
for another photobook with this camera. The photobook settings may be
overwritten.
COPY
295
Customizing the
Camera
You can customize various camera functions to suit
your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions.
Custom Functions can be set and used only in Creative
Zone modes.
C
r
e
a
t
i
v
e
Z
o
n
e
COPY
296
1Select [Custom Functions (C.Fn)].
Under the [54] tab, select [Custom
Functions (C.Fn)], then press <0>.
2Select the Custom Function
number.
Press the <U> key to select the
Custom Function number, then press
<0>.
3Change the setting as desired.
Press the <V> key to select the
setting (number), then press <0>.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to
set another Custom Functions.
At the bottom of the screen, the
current Custom Function settings are
indicated below the respective
function numbers.
4Exit the setting.
Press the <M> button.
XThe screen for step 1 will reappear.
Under [54: Clear settings], select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to
clear all the Custom Function settings currently set (p.214).
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
Custom Function number
Clearing All Custom Functions
COPY
297
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
* [5: ISO speed] is settable only for manual exposure shooting.
Custom Functions
C.Fn I: Exposure
A LV
Shooting
kMovie
Shooting
1Exposure level increments p.298 k k
2ISO expansion kIn a
C.Fn II: Image
3Highlight tone priority p.299 k k
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive
4AF-assist beam firing p.300
k (With
f*)
5 Mirror lockup
* If you use an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light,
the LED light will turn on for AF-assist even in the c, o, and d modes.
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others
6Shutter/AE lock button p.301 k k
7Assign SET button p.302 k
(Except 3)
k
(Except
2, 3)*
8 LCD display when power ON p.302
The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV
shooting) or movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)
COPY
298
Custom Functions are organized into four groups based on the function
type: C.Fn I: Exposure, C.Fn II: Image, C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive, C.Fn
IV: Operation/Others.
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn-1 Exposure level increments
0: 1/3-stop
1: 1/2-stop
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is effective
when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-
stop increments.
C.Fn-2 ISO expansion
0: Off
1: On
When you set the ISO speed, you will be able to set “H” (equivalent to
ISO 25600) for still photos and “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) for movies.
Note that if [C.Fn-3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable], “H”
cannot be set.
With setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on
the LCD monitor as shown below.
COPY
299
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II: Image
C.Fn-3 Highlight tone priority
0: Disable
1: Enable
Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded from the
standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays
and highlights becomes smoother.
With setting 1, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.125) is automatically set to
[Disable] and the setting cannot be changed.
With setting 1, noise (grainy image, banding, etc.) may become slightly
more pronounced than with setting 0.
With setting 1, the settable range will be ISO 200 - ISO 12800 (up to ISO
6400 for movies).
Also, the <A> icon will be displayed on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder when highlight tone priority is enabled.
COPY
3 Custom Function SettingsN
300
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive
C.Fn-4 AF-assist beam firing
The settings to specify whether or not the AF-assist beam is emitted by the
camera’s built-in flash or by an external, EOS-dedicated Speedlite can be
set.
0: Enable
If necessary, the AF-assist beam will be emitted by the built-in flash or
external Speedlite.
1: Disable
The AF-assist beam is not emitted.
2: Enable external flash only
If an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam when
necessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the AF-assist beam.
3: IR AF assist beam only
Among external Speedlites, only those which have an infrared AF-assist
beam will be able to emit the beam. This prevents any Speedlite which
uses a series of intermittent flashes (like the built-in flash) from firing the
AF-assist beam.
With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED light
will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.
C.Fn-5 Mirror lockup
0: Disable
1: Enable
Prevents mechanical vibrations in the camera caused by the reflex
mirror action (mirror shock), which can disturb shooting with super
telephoto lenses or close-up (macro) shooting. See page 142 for the
mirror lockup procedure.
If the external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set
to [Disabled], the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam even if the
camera’s C.Fn-4 is set to 0, 2, or 3.
COPY
301
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others
C.Fn-6 Shutter/AE lock button
0: AF/AE lock
1: AE lock/AF
This is convenient when you want to focus and meter separately. Press
the <A> button to autofocus, and press the shutter button halfway to
apply AE lock.
2: AF/AF lock, no AE lock
In the AI Servo AF operation, you can press the <A> button to stop the
AF operation momentarily. This prevents the AF from being thrown off by
any obstacle passing between the camera and subject. The exposure is
set at the moment the picture is taken.
3: AE/AF, no AE lock
This is useful for subjects which keep moving and stopping repeatedly.
During AI Servo AF, you can press the <A> button to start or stop the AI
Servo AF operation. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is
taken. Thus, the optimum focusing and exposure will always be
achieved as you wait for the decisive moment.
During Live View shooting or movie shooting
• With setting 1 or 3, press the <A> button for One-Shot AF. Also, using
the touch shutter will take a picture without autofocusing.
• With setting 2, press the shutter button halfway for One-Shot AF.
COPY
3 Custom Function SettingsN
302
C.Fn-7 Assign SET button
You can assign a frequently-used function to <0>. Press <0> when the
camera is ready to shoot.
0: Normal (disabled)
1: Image quality
Press <0> to display the image-recording quality setting screen on the
LCD monitor. Select the desired image-recording quality, then press
<0>.
2: Flash exposure compensation
When you press <0>, the flash exposure compensation setting screen
will appear. Set the flash exposure compensation, then press <0>.
3: LCD monitor On/Off
Assigns the same function as the <B> button.
4: Menu display
Press <0> to display the menu screen.
5: ISO speed
The ISO speed setting screen will appear. Press the <U> key or turn
the <6> dial to change the ISO speed. You can also refer to the
viewfinder to set the ISO speed.
C.Fn-8 LCD display when power ON
0: Display on
When the power switch is turned on, the shooting settings will be
displayed (p.50).
1: Previous display status
If you pressed the <B> button and turned off the camera while the
LCD monitor was off, the shooting settings will not be displayed when
you turn on the camera again. This helps to save battery power. The
menu screens and image playback will still be displayed when used.
If you pressed the <B> button to display the shooting settings and
then turn off the camera, the shooting settings will be displayed when
you turn on the camera again.
COPY
303
Under the My Menu tab, you can register up to six menu options and
Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently.
1Select [My Menu settings].
Under the [9] tab, select [My Menu
settings], then press <0>.
2Select [Register to My Menu].
Select [Register to My Menu], then
press <0>.
3Register the desired items.
Select an item to register, then press
<0>.
On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK] and press <0> to register the
item.
You can register up to six items.
To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
Sort
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort] and select the item whose order you want to change. Then
press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the <V> key to change the
order, then press <0>.
Delete item/items and Delete all items
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete item/items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items] deletes all
registered items.
Display from My Menu
When [Enable] is set, the [9] tab will be displayed first when you
display the menu screen.
3 Registering My MenuN
About My Menu Settings
COPY
COPY
305
Reference
This chapter provides reference information for camera
features, system accessories, etc.
Certification Logo
If you select [54: Certification Logo Display] and press <0>,
some of the logos of the camera’s certifications will appear. Other
certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the
camera body, or on the camera’s package.
COPY
306
With AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately), you can connect the
camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining
battery level.
1Connect the power cord.
Connect the power cord as shown in
the illustration.
After using the camera, unplug the
power plug from the power outlet.
2Connect the DC Coupler.
Connect the DC cord’s plug to the DC
Coupler.
3Insert the DC Coupler.
Open the cover and insert the DC
Coupler until it locks in place.
4Push in the DC cord.
Open the DC cord hole cover and
install the cord as shown.
Close the cover.
Using a Household Power Outlet
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord while the camera’s power
switch is set to <1>.
COPY
307
This remote controller enables you to take pictures wirelessly up to
approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera. You can either shoot
immediately or use a 2-sec. delay.
Set the self-timer to <Q> (p.106).
Point the remote controller toward the camera’s remote control
sensor and press the transmit button.
XThe camera will autofocus.
XWhen focus is achieved, the self-timer lamp will light up and the
picture will be taken.
Remote Control Shooting
Remote Controller RC-6 (Sold Separately)
Remote control sensor
Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by triggering
the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from such light
sources.
Remote Controller RC-1/RC-5 (sold separately) can also be used.
Remote control shooting is also possible with an EX-series Speedlite
equipped with a remote-release function.
The Remote Controller can also be used during movie shooting (p.173).
Note that still photo shooting in the movie shooting mode is not possible
with the Remote Controller RC-5.
COPY
Remote Control Shooting
308
Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) comes with an approx.
60 cm/2.0 ft cord. When connected to the camera’s remote control
terminal, it can be pressed halfway and completely, just like the shutter
button.
When you use the self-timer, bulb, or Remote Switch and do not look
through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the
image to look dark. To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.27)
attached to the camera strap.
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the eyepiece
cover is unnecessary.
1Remove the eyecup.
Push the bottom of the eyecup to
remove.
2Attach the eyepiece cover.
Slide the eyepiece cover down into
the eyepiece groove to attach it.
After taking the picture, detach the
eyepiece cover and attach the
eyecup by sliding it down the
eyepiece groove.
F Remote Switch RS-60E3 (Sold Separately)
Using the Eyepiece Cover
COPY
309
Basically operates like a built-in flash for easy operation.
When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) is attached to the
camera, almost all the autoflash control is done by the camera. In other
words, it is like a high-output flash attached externally in place of the
built-in flash.
For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s
instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all
the features of EX-series Speedlites.
External Speedlites
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites
Shoe-mount Speedlites Macro Lites
With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings
(p.220), only [Flash exposure compensation] can be set for [External
flash func. setting]. (With certain EX-series Speedlites, [Shutter
synchronization] is also settable.)
If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite, the
flash exposure compensation icon displayed on the camera’s LCD
monitor will change from y to 0.
If the Speedlite’s Custom Function has the flash metering mode set to
TTL autoflash, the flash will fire at full output only.
COPY
External Speedlites
310
With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set in TTL or A-TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or
<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before
shooting.
When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the
manual flash mode.
Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with compact, non-Canon flash units at
1/200 sec. or slower shutter speeds. Use a sync speed slower than
1/200 sec.
Be sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it synchronizes
properly with the camera.
Cautions for Live View shooting
A non-Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting.
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series
Using Non-Canon Flash Units
If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and
malfunction may result.
Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It may
not fire.
COPY
311
With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can
automatically transfer captured images to a personal computer or
upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN.
The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on
how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image
transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or
contact the card’s manufacturer.
The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card functions
(including wireless transfer). In case of an issue with an Eye-Fi
card, please check with the card manufacturer. Also note that
approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many countries or
regions. Without approval, use of the card is not permitted. If it
is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in your
area, please check with the card manufacturer.
1Insert an Eye-Fi card (p.31).
2Select [Eye-Fi settings].
Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi
settings], then press <0>.
This menu is displayed only when an
Eye-Fi card is inserted into the
camera.
3Enable Eye-Fi transmission.
Press <0>, set [Eye-Fi trans.] to
[Enable], then press <0>.
If you set [Disable], automatic
transmission will not occur even with
the Eye-Fi card inserted
(transmission status icon I).
4Display the connection
information.
Select [Connection info.], then press
<0>.
Using Eye-Fi Cards
COPY
Using Eye-Fi Cards
312
5Check the [Access point SSID:].
Check that an access point is
displayed for [Access point SSID:].
You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s
MAC address and firmware version.
Press the <M> button three times
to exit the menu.
6Take the picture.
XThe picture is transferred and the
<H> icon switches from gray (not
connected) to one of the icons below.
For transferred images, O is
displayed in the shooting information
display (p.270).
H(Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.
H(Blinking) Connecting : Connection with access point.
H(Displayed) Connected : Connection to access point established.
H( ) Transferring :
Image transfer to access point in progress.
T
ransmission status icon
COPY
313
Using Eye-Fi Cards
Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards
If “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card
information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.
Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In
hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are
prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.
If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and
personal computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction
manual.
Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image
transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.
Because of the transmission function, the Eye-Fi card may become hot.
The battery power will be consumed faster.
During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.
COPY
314
o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled
*1: The z icon indicates still photo shooting in the movie shooting mode.
*2: 1+73 or 1 cannot be selected.
*3: Settable only for manual exposures.
*4: Set automatically in Basic Zone modes.
*5: Settable only in Creative Zone modes.
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Function
Basic Zone Creative Zone Movie
A 7 C2 3 4 5 8d s f a kz*1
6 F G
All image quality
settings selectable kkkkkkkkk*2k*2kkkk k
ISO
speed
Automatically set/Auto ISO
oooooooo o o kkkk k
Manual kkkk k*3
Maximum for Auto
kkkk
Picture
Style
Automatic Selection/Auto
oooooooo o o kkkkk*4
Manual selection
kkkk k*5
Ambience-based shots kkkkkk k
Light/scene-based shots
kkkk
White
balance
Auto oooooooo o o kkkk k*4
Preset kkkk k*5
Custom kkkk k*5
Correction/Bracketing
kkkk*6k*5
Auto Lighting Optimizer
oooooooo o o kkkk k*5
Lens
aberration
correction
Peripheral
illumination correction
kkkkkkkk k k kkkk k
Chromatic
aberration correction
kkkkkkkk k k kkkk
Long exposure noise reduction
kkkk
High ISO speed noise reduction
oooooooo o o kkkk
Highlight tone priority kkkk k*5
Color
space
sRGB oooooooo o o kkkkok*5
Adobe RGB kkkk k*5
Focusing
One-Shot AF ooo o o o kkkk c
o
d
f
*
7
AI Servo AF okkkk
AI Focus AF ooo kkkk
AF point selection
oooooooo o o kkkkf
*
7
AF-assist beam
ooo *8o*8o o o kkkk
COPY
315
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
*6: White balance correction can be set.
*7: Settable only for Live View shooting.
*8: If the AF method is <f> during Live View shooting, the external
Speedlite will emit the AF-assist beam when necessary.
*9: With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
*10: Works only before the start of movie shooting.
Function
Basic Zone Creative Zone Movie
A 7 C2 3 4 5 8d s f a kz*1
6 F G
Metering
mode
Evaluative metering
ooooooooookkkk
Metering mode selection
kkkk
Exposure
Program shift
k
Exposure
compensation kkk k*5
Other than
a
AEB kkkk
AE lock kkk *9k*5
Depth-of-field preview
kkkk
Drive
Single shooting kkkkkkkkkkkkkk k
Continuous shooting
kkkkkkkkkkkkkk k*10
Q (10 sec.) kkkkkkkkkkkkkk k*10
l (2 sec.) kkkkkkkkkkkkkk k*10
q
(Continuous)
kkkkkkkkkkkkkk k*10
Built-in
flash
Automatic firing oko o o
Manual firing k k kkkk
Flash off ok o o kokkkk o
Red-eye reduction
kkk kkk kkkk
FE lock kkkk
Flash exposure
compensation
kkkk
Wireless control kkkk
External
flash
Function settings
kkkk
Custom Function
settings
kkkk
Live View shooting kkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Aspect ratio*7kkkk
Quick Control kkkkkkkkkkkkkk k
Feature guide kkkkkkkkkkkkkk k
COPY
316
System Map
Eyecup Ef
Rubber Frame Ef
Eyepiece Extender
EP-EX15
ll
Angle Finder C
E-series Dioptric
Adjustment Lenses
Wide Strap
EW-100DB IV
270EX IIST-E2 ST-E3-RT 430EX II320EX 600EX-RT/
600EX
Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX
Macro Twin Lite
MT-24EX
Hand Strap E2
Battery Pack
LP-E8
Battery Grip
BG-E8
Battery Charger
LC-E8 or LC-E8E
Compact Power
Adapter
CA-PS700
Battery Magazine
BGM-E8A for
size-AA/LR6 batteries
Battery Magazine
BGM-E8L for two
LP-E8 battery packs
DC Coupler
DR-E8
Bundled
Accessories
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-E8
90EX
COPY
317
System Map
EF-S lensesEF lenses
Remote Switch
RS-60E3
Remote
Controller
RC-6
External microphone
HDMI Cable
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)
TV/Video
PictBridge-compatible printer
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)
EOS DIGITAL
Solution Disk
Interface Cable
(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)
Interface Cable IFC-200U/500U
(1.9 m/6.2 ft.) / (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)
Card reader
SD/SDHC/SDXC
memory card
Card slot
USB port
Windows 8
Windows 7
Windows Vista
Windows XP
Mac OS X
Computer
GPS Receiver
GP-E2
* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.
Semi Hard Case
EH22-L/EH24-L
COPY
318
Shooting 1 (Red) Page
* Not selectable if the <F> or <G> shooting mode, Multi Shot Noise Reduction,
or a Creative filter is set.
Shooting 2 (Red)
3 Menu Settings
For Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting
Image quality 73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c /
1+73* / 1*88
Beep Enable / Touch to / Disable 204
Release shutter
without card Enable / Disable 204
Image review Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 204
Lens aberration
correction
Peripheral illumination: Enable / Disable
Chromatic aberration: Enable / Disable 129
Red-eye reduction Disable / Enable 108
Flash control
Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync.
speed in Av mode / Built-in flash settings /
External flash function settings / External flash
C.Fn settings / Clear settings
218
Exposure
compensation/AEB
1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops (AEB:
±2 stops) 121
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Disable / Low / Standard / High 125
Disable during manual exposure
Custom White Balance
Manual setting of white balance 137
White balance shift/
bracketing
WB correction: White balance correction
BKT setting: White balance bracketing
139
140
Color space sRGB / Adobe RGB 141
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / SNeutral / UFaithful /
VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3
95
132
135
Metering mode
q Evaluative metering / w Partial metering /
r Spot metering /
e Center-weighted average metering
117
Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
COPY
319
3 Menu Settings
Shooting 3 (Red) Page
A Live View Shooting (Red)
Playback 1 (Blue)
Dust Delete Data Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots 224
ISO Auto Max.: 400 / Max.: 800 / Max.: 1600 /
Max.: 3200 / Max.: 6400 94
Long exposure noise
reduction Disable / Auto / Enable 127
High ISO speed noise
reduction
Disable / Low / Standard / High /
Multi Shot Noise Reduction 126
Live View shooting Enable / Disable 147
AF method u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /
FlexiZone - Single / Quick mode 159
Continuous AF Enable / Disable 156
Touch Shutter Disable / Enable 168
Grid display Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m156
Aspect ratio 3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1 157
Metering timer 4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /
30 min. 158
Protect images
Select images / All images in folder / Unprotect
all images in folder / All images on card /
Unprotect all images on card
266
Rotate image Rotate vertical images 247
Erase images Select and erase images / All images in folder /
All images on card 268
Print order Specify images to be printed (DPOF) 289
Photobook Set-up Select images / All images in folder / Clear all in
folder / All images on card / Clear all on card 293
Creative filters
Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect /
Art bold effect / Water painting effect /
Toy camera effect / Miniature effect
274
Resize Downsize the image’s pixel count 277
COPY
3 Menu Settings
320
Playback 2 (Blue) Page
Set-up 1 (Yellow)
* Displayed only when an Eye-Fi card is used.
Set-up 2 (Yellow)
* The daylight saving time setting is linked to [Time zone] and [Date/time].
Histogram display Brightness / RGB 272
Image jump w/61 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /
Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating 243
Slide show Playback description / Display time / Repeat /
Transition effect / Background music 258
Rating [OFF] / l / m / n / o / p248
Control over HDMI Disable / Enable 263
Select folder Create and select a folder 206
File numbering Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset 208
Auto rotate OnzD / OnD / Off 212
Format card Initialize and erase data on the card 48
Eye-Fi settings* Eye-Fi transmission: Disable / Enable
Connection information 311
Auto power off 30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. /
15 min. / Disable 205
LCD brightness Seven brightness levels provided 205
LCD auto off Enable / Disable 217
Time zone Daylight saving time* / Time zone 36
Date/Time Date (year, month, day) / Time (hour, min.,
sec.) / Daylight saving time* 36
LanguageKSelect the interface language 38
Video system NTSC / PAL 265
COPY
321
3 Menu Settings
Set-up 3 (Yellow) Page
Set-up 4 (Yellow)
* During firmware updates, the touch screen will be disabled to prevent accidental
operations.
9 My Menu (Green)
Screen color Select the shooting settings screen color 217
Feature guide Enable / Disable 52
Touch control Enable / Disable 55
Sensor cleaning
Auto cleaning: Enable / Disable 223
Clean now
Clean manually 226
GPS device settings Settings available when the GPS Receiver GP-
E2 (sold separately) is attached –
Certification Logo
Display
Displays some of the logos of the camera’s
certifications 305
Custom Functions
(C.Fn) Customize camera functions as desired 296
Copyright information
Display copyright information /
Enter author’s name / Enter copyright details /
Delete copyright information
210
Clear settings Clear all camera settings /
Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn) 214
zFirmware Ver.* For updating the firmware –
My Menu settings Register frequently-used menu options and
Custom Functions 303
When using a GPS device, be sure to check the countries and areas of use,
and use the device in accordance with the laws and regulations of the
country or region.
COPY
3 Menu Settings
322
Shooting 1 (Red) Page
Shooting 2 (Red)
Shooting 3 (Red)
k For Movie Shooting
Image quality 73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c /
1+73 / 188
Beep Enable / Touch to / Disable 204
Release shutter
without card Enable / Disable 204
Image review Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 204
Lens aberration
correction Peripheral illumination: Enable / Disable 129
Exposure
compensation 1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops 121
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Disable / Low / Standard / High 125
Disable during manual exposure
Custom White
Balance Manual setting of white balance 137
White balance shift/
bracketing
WB correction: White balance correction
BKT setting: White balance bracketing
139
140
Color space sRGB / Adobe RGB 141
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / SNeutral / UFaithful /
VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3
95
132
135
Dust Delete Data Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots 224
Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
The menu tabs and options displayed will differ between viewfinder
shooting/Live View shooting and movie shooting. Note that the menu
tabs and options displayed in [x1] Playback 1, [x2] Playback 2, [51]
Set-up 1 to [54] Set-up 4 and [9] My Menu are the same as those
displayed in viewfinder shooting/Live View shooting (p.319 - 321).
The [Z1] and [Z2] Menu tabs will appear only for movie shooting.
COPY
323
3 Menu Settings
Movie 1 (Red) Page
Movie 2 (Red)
* In Basic Zone modes, [Sound recording] will be set to [On/Off].
AF method u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /
FlexiZone - Single 196
Movie Servo AF Enable / Disable 196
AF with shutter button
during kONE SHOT / Disable 197
Grid display Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m198
Metering timer 4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /
30 min. 198
Movie recording size 1920x1080 (6/5/4) / 1280x720 (8/7) /
640x480 (6/5)185
Sound recording*
Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable
198Recording level
Wind filter/Attenuator: Disable / Enable
Video snapshot
Video snapshot: Enable / Disable
187
Album settings: Create a new album / Add to
existing album
COPY
324
If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Do not recharge any battery pack other than a genuine Canon Battery
Pack LP-E8.
If there is a problem with the battery charger, the protective circuit will
stop the charging operation and the charge lamp will blink in orange. If
this happens, disconnect the charger’s power plug from the power
outlet and remove the battery pack. Attach the battery pack to the
charger again and wait a while before connecting the charger to a
power outlet again.
Make sure the battery is properly installed in the camera (p.30).
Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.30).
Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.31).
Recharge the battery (p.28).
Press the <B> button (p.50).
If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card,
the access lamp will remain on/continue to blink for a few seconds.
When the image recording is completed, the power will turn off
automatically.
Troubleshooting Guide
Power-Related Problems
The battery pack does not recharge.
The battery charger’s lamp blinks.
The camera does not operate even when the power switch
is set to <1>.
The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is
set to <2>.
COPY
325
Troubleshooting Guide
Use a fully-charged battery pack (p.28).
The rechargeable battery pack performance will degrade over
repeated use. Purchase a new one.
The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Often activating only the AF without taking a picture.
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor often.
• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged
period.
Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take
effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.205).
Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will
still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min. (The camera’s
power does not turn off.) Press the <B> button to turn on the LCD
monitor.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
The camera turns off by itself.
COPY
Troubleshooting Guide
326
Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.31).
Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase position (p.31).
If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images
to make room (p.31, 268).
If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF operation while the focus
confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be
taken. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically,
or focus manually (p.43, 103).
If a card error message is displayed, see page 32 or 337.
Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF> (p.39).
To prevent camera shake, press the shutter button gently (p.42, 43).
If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (p.110), set a higher ISO speed (p.92), use flash (p.107), or use
a tripod.
Shooting-Related Problems
No images can be shot or recorded.
The card cannot be used.
The image is out of focus.
COPY
327
Troubleshooting Guide
Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Focus lock is not possible in the
AI Servo AF and AI Focus AF operations (p.98).
Depending on the shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus the
subject. Use FlexiZone - Single instead or focus manually.
Depending on the lens type, shutter speed, aperture, subject
conditions, brightness, etc., the continuous shooting speed may
become slower.
With ISO 12800 or “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600), the maximum burst
for continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.93).
Set [z3: High ISO speed NR] to [Standard/Low/Disable]. If it is set
to [High] or [Multi Shot Noise Reduction], the maximum burst during
continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.126).
With [Chromatic aberration: Enable], the maximum burst for
continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.130).
During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
decrease (p.140).
If you shoot something that has fine detail (such as a field of grass),
the file size will be larger and the actual maximum burst may be lower
than the number mentioned on page 89.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
With FlexiZone - Multi, it takes longer to autofocus.
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
COPY
Troubleshooting Guide
328
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 cannot be set. If [0: Disable] is set, ISO
100 can be set (p.299). This also applies to movie shooting (p.178).
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable], the [H] ISO speed (25600) cannot be selected
even when [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1: On]. If [0: Disable] is set
for [3: Highlight tone priority], [H] can be set (p.298).
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. If [0:
Disable] is set, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.299).
Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable]. When [Standard/
Low/High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure compensation
or flash exposure compensation, the image may come out bright
(p.125).
If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed
becomes slow automatically (slow-sync shooting) so that both the
subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow
shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in
Av mode] to [1/200-1/60 sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] (p.219).
ISO 100 cannot be set.
ISO speed [H] (ISO 25600) cannot be set.
The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set.
Even though I set a decreased exposure compensation,
the image comes out bright.
When I use the <f> mode with flash, the shutter speed
becomes slow.
COPY
329
Troubleshooting Guide
In the A, C, 2, 4, 6, and G modes, the built-in flash will be
raised automatically when flash is necessary.
If you shoot continuously with the built-in flash at short intervals, the
flash may stop operating to protect the flash unit.
If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will
always be fired at full output (p.310).
Under [z1: Flash control] and [External flash C.Fn setting], if
[Flash metering mode] is set to [TTL], the flash will always fire at full
output (p.220).
If flash exposure compensation has been set on an external Speedlite,
[Flash exposure compensation] (p.221) cannot be set in the
[External flash func. setting] screen. Also, if you set flash exposure
compensation with the camera and then set flash exposure
compensation with the external Speedlite, the Speedlite’s flash
exposure compensation setting will be given priority. When the
Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to 0), [Flash
exposure compensation] can be set with the camera.
The built-in flash is raised by itself.
The built-in flash does not fire.
The flash always fires at full output.
I cannot set flash exposure compensation with external
flash function setting.
COPY
Troubleshooting Guide
330
Under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to
[Auto] (p.219).
The built-in flash’s pop-up mechanism moves slightly. This is normal.
If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot
(p.147).
It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white
<s> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.
If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View or
movie shooting will soon stop automatically (p.171, 200).
If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop
automatically. Use an SD Speed Class 6 “ ” or faster card. To
find out the card’s read/write speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s
Web site, etc.
If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically.
High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.
The camera makes a noise when it is shaken.
The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View
shooting.
During Live View and movie shooting, a white <s> or
red <E> icon is displayed.
Movie shooting stops by itself.
COPY
331
Troubleshooting Guide
In shooting modes other than <a>, the ISO speed is set
automatically. In the <a> mode, you can freely set the ISO speed
(p.178).
If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the
changes in the exposure may be recorded.
Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the
exposure regardless of whether the lens’ maximum aperture changes
or not. Changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result.
If you move the camera to the left or right quickly (high-speed panning)
or shoot a moving subject, the image may look distorted.
Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent light, LED bulbs, or other light sources during
movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or color
tone may also be recorded. In the <a> mode, a slow shutter speed
may solve the problem.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.
The exposure changes during movie shooting.
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie
shooting.
COPY
Troubleshooting Guide
332
Check if your finger is covering the speaker (p.21).
Check if [Enable] is set with [53: Touch control] (p.55).
In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode, certain tabs and
menu options are not displayed. Set the shooting mode to a Creative
Zone mode (p.46).
Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character
will be an underscore (p.141).
It is a movie file (p.209).
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may
not start from 0001 (p.208).
Operation Problems
During touch screen operations, the beeper suddenly
sounds softer.
Touch screen operation is not possible.
Display Problems
The menu screen shows few tabs and options.
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
The file name starts with “MVI_”.
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
COPY
333
Troubleshooting Guide
Make sure the correct date and time has been set (p.36).
Check the time zone and daylight savings time (p.36).
The shooting date and time does not appear in the picture. The date
and time is instead recorded in the image data as shooting
information. When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the
picture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting information
(p.285).
If the card has recorded a number of images greater than the camera
can display, [###] will be displayed (p.249).
If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow
or may look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.
[Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted in
the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to the
LOCK position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection
status or disable Eye-Fi card transmission (p.311).
The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.
The date and time is not in the picture.
[###] is displayed.
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.
[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.
COPY
Troubleshooting Guide
334
It is the highlight alert (p.272). Overexposed highlight areas with a loss
of highlight detail will blink.
If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.266).
Movies edited with a personal computer using the provided
ImageBrowser EX (p.364) or other software cannot be played back
with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with EOS
Video Snapshot Task (p.195) can be played back on the camera.
If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the
operation noise will also be recorded. Using an external microphone
(commercially available) is recommended (p.198).
During autoexposure movie shooting, if there is a drastic change in the
exposure level, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness
stabilizes. If this happens, shoot with <a> shooting mode (p.177).
Make sure the stereo AV cable or HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the
way in (p.262, 265).
Set the video OUT system (NTSC/PAL) to the same video system as
the TV set (p.265).
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
The image cannot be erased.
The movie cannot be played back.
When the movie is played back, camera operation noise
can be heard.
The movie has still moments.
No image appears on the TV screen.
COPY
335
Troubleshooting Guide
If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created
automatically (p.186).
Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC cards
may not be correctly recognized. If this occurs, connect your camera
to the computer with the provided interface cable, then transfer the
images to your computer using EOS Utility (provided software, p.364).
JPEG c and 1 images cannot be resized (p.277).
There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.
My card reader does not recognize the card.
I cannot resize the image.
COPY
Troubleshooting Guide
336
If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a noise, but no
picture is taken (p.223).
If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.34).
What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer. This
instruction manual lists all the printing effects available (p.284).
Install the provided software (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk CD-ROM)
on the computer (p.366).
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
Printing-Related Problems
There are fewer printing effects than listed in this instruction
manual.
Computer Connection Problems
I cannot download images to a computer.
COPY
337
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the on-
screen instructions.
*If the error still persists, write down the error number and contact your
nearest Canon Service Center.
Error Codes
Number Error Message and Solution
01
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the
lens contacts.
ÎClean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens or use a
Canon lens (p.17, 20).
02
Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card
with camera.
ÎRemove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the
card (p.31, 48).
04
Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.
ÎReplace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card
(p.31, 268, 48).
05
The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on
again.
ÎOperate the power switch (p.34).
06
Sensor cleaning is not possible. Turn the camera off and on
again.
ÎOperate the power switch (p.34).
10, 20,
30, 40,
50, 60,
70, 80,
99
Shooting is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and
on again or re-install the battery.
ÎOperate the power switch, remove and install the battery pack
again, or use a Canon lens (p.34, 30).
Error number
Countermeasures
COPY
338
•Type
Type:
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in flash
Recording media:
SD memory card, SDHC memory card, SDXC memory card
* Compatible with UHS-I
Image sensor size: Approx. 22.3 x 14.9 mm
Compatible lenses: Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)
* Excluding EF-M lenses
(35 mm-equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6 times the
lens focal length)
Lens mount: Canon EF mount
• Image Sensor
Type: CMOS sensor
Effective pixels: Approx. 18.00 megapixels
Aspect ratio: 3:2
Dust delete feature: Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending
• Recording System
Recording format: Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0
Image type: JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original)
RAW+JPEG Large simultaneous recording possible
Recorded pixels: L (Large) : Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)
M (Medium) : Approx. 8.00 megapixels (3456 x 2304)
S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 4.50 megapixels (2592 x 1728)
S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.50 megapixels (1920 x 1280)
S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)
RAW : Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)
• Image Processing During Shooting
Picture Style: Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,
Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3
Basic+: Ambience-based shots, Light/scene-based shots
White balance: Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light,
White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom
White balance correction and white balance bracketing
features provided
* Flash color temperature information transmission enabled
Noise reduction: Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots
Automatic image
brightness correction: Auto Lighting Optimizer
Highlight tone priority: Provided
Lens aberration correction
:
Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration correction
Specifications
COPY
339
Specifications
• Viewfinder
Type: Eye-level pentamirror
Coverage:
Vertical/Horizontal approx. 95% (with Eye point approx. 19 mm)
Magnification: Approx. 0.85x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)
Eye point: Approx. 19 mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)
Built-in dioptric adjustment
: Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Focusing screen: Fixed, Precision Matte
Mirror: Quick-return type
Depth-of-field preview: Provided
• Autofocus
Type: TTL secondary image-registration, phase detection
AF points: Nine cross-type AF points (Cross-type AF sensitive to
f/2.8 with center AF point)
Focusing brightness range:
EV -0.5 - 18 (center AF point, at 23°C/73°F, ISO 100)
AF operation: One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF
AF-assist beam: Small series of flashes fired by built-in flash
• Exposure Control
Metering modes: 63-zone TTL full-aperture metering
• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)
• Partial metering (approx. 9% of viewfinder at center)
• Spot metering (approx. 4% of viewfinder at center)
• Center-weighted average metering
Metering brightness range
:
EV 1 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm f/1.8 II lens, ISO 100)
Exposure control: Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto, Flash Off, Creative
Auto, Portrait, Landscape, Close-up, Sports, Special
scene (Night Portrait, Handheld Night Scene, HDR
Backlight Control), Program), Shutter-priority AE,
Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure
ISO speed:
Basic Zone modes*: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set automatically
(Recommended * Portrait: ISO 100, Handheld Night Scene:
exposure index) ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set automatically
Creative Zone modes: ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set manually
(whole-stop increments), ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set
automatically, maximum ISO speed settable for ISO
Auto, or ISO expansion to “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600)
Exposure compensation
: Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
AEB: ±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (Can be
combined with manual exposure compensation)
COPY
Specifications
340
AE lock: Auto: Applied in One-Shot AF with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
Manual: With AE lock button
•Shutter
Type: Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter
Shutter speeds: 1/4000 sec. to 30 sec. (Total shutter speed range.
Available range varies by shooting mode.), Bulb, X-sync
at 1/200 sec.
• Flash
Built-in flash: Retractable, auto pop-up flash
Guide No.: Approx. 13/43 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)
Flash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of view
Recycling time approx. 3 sec.
Wireless master function provided
External flash:
EX-series Speedlite (Flash functions settable with the camera)
Flash metering: E-TTL II autoflash
Flash exposure compensation
: ±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
FE lock: Provided
PC terminal: None
• Drive System
Drive mode:
Single shooting, continuous shooting, self-timer with 10-sec.
or 2-sec. delay and 10-sec. delay with continuous shooting
Continuous shooting speed
: Max. approx. 5 shots/sec.
Max. burst (Approx.): JPEG Large/Fine: 22 (30) shots
RAW: 6 (6) shots
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: 3 (3) shots
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible
8 GB card based on Canon’s testing standards.
* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (ISO
100 and “Standard” Picture Style) using an 8 GB card.
• Live View Shooting
Aspect ratio settings: 3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1
Focusing: Hybrid CMOS AF System* (Face+Tracking, FlexiZone-
Multi, FlexiZone-Single), Phase-difference detection
(Quick mode)
Manual focusing (approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)
* Focusing brightness range: EV 1 - 18 (at 23°C/73°F,
ISO 100)
COPY
341
Specifications
Continuous AF: Provided
Touch shutter: Provided
Metering modes: Real-time metering with image sensor
Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering
(approx. 8.8% of Live View screen), Spot metering
(approx. 2.8% of Live View screen), Center-weighted
average metering
Metering brightness range
:
EV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens, ISO 100)
Creative filters: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect
Grid display: Two types
• Movie Shooting
Recording format: MOV
Movie: MPEG-4 AVC / H.264
Variable (average) bit rate
Audio: Linear PCM
Recording size
and frame rate: 1920x1080 (Full HD): 30p/25p/24p
1280x720 (HD) : 60p/50p
640x480 (SD) : 30p/25p
* 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25.00 fps, 24p: 23.98 fps,
60p: 59.94 fps, 50p: 50.00 fps
File size: 1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p): Approx. 330 MB/min.
1280x720 (60p/50p) : Approx. 330 MB/min.
640x480 (30p/25p) : Approx. 82.5 MB/min.
Focusing: Hybrid CMOS AF System* (Face+Tracking, FlexiZone-
Multi, FlexiZone-Single)
Manual focusing (approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)
* Focusing brightness range: EV 1 - 18 (at 23°C/73°F, ISO 100)
Metering modes: Center-weighted average and evaluative metering with
the image sensor
* Automatically set by the focusing mode
Servo AF: Provided
Metering brightness range
:
EV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens, ISO 100)
Exposure control: Program AE for movies and manual exposure
Exposure compensation
: ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments (Still photos: ±5 stops)
COPY
Specifications
342
ISO speed: With autoexposure shooting: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set
(Recommended automatically
exposure index)
With manual exposure: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set automatically/
manually, expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 12800)
Video snapshots: Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
Sound recording: Built-in stereo microphone
External stereo microphone terminal provided
Sound recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,
attenuator provided
Grid display: Two types
• LCD Monitor
Type: TFT color liquid-crystal monitor
Monitor size and dots: Wide, 7.7 cm (3.0-in.) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots
Angle adjustment: Possible
Brightness adjustment: Manual (7 levels)
Interface languages: 25
Touch screen technology
: Capacitive sensing
Feature guide: Displayable
• Playback
Image display formats: Single-image display, Single-image + Info display (Basic
info, shooting info, histogram), 4-image index, 9-image
index
Zoom magnification: Approx. 1.5x - 10x
Highlight alert: Overexposed highlights blink
Image browsing methods
: Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting
date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by rating
Image rotate: Possible
Ratings: Provided
Movie playback: Enabled (LCD monitor, video/audio OUT, HDMI OUT)
Built-in speaker
Image protect: Possible
Slide show:
All images, by date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by rating
Five transition effects selectable
Background music: Selectable for slide shows and movie playback
• Post-Processing of Images
Creative filters: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect
Resize: Possible
COPY
343
Specifications
• Direct Printing
Compatible printers: PictBridge-compatible printers
Printable images: JPEG and RAW images
Print ordering: DPOF Version 1.1 compatible
• Custom Functions
Custom Functions: 8
My Menu registration: Possible
Copyright information: Entry and inclusion possible
• Interface
Audio/video OUT/
Digital terminal:
Analog video (compatible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio output
Personal computer communication and direct printing
(Hi-Speed USB equivalent), GPS Receiver GP-E2
connection
HDMI mini OUT terminal
: Type C (auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible
External microphone
IN terminal: 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
Remote control terminal
: For Remote Switch RS-60E3
Wireless remote control
: Remote Controller RC-6
Eye-Fi card: Compatible
•Power
Battery: Battery Pack LP-E8 (Quantity 1)
* AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8
* With Battery Grip BG-E8 attached, size-AA/LR6
batteries can be used
Possible shots: With viewfinder shooting:
(Based on CIPA
Approx. 440 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 400 shots at 0°C/32°F
testing standards) With Live View shooting:
Approx. 180 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 150 shots at 0°C/32°F
Movie shooting time: Approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at 23
°C
/73°F
Approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at 0
°C
/32°F
(with a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8)
• Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
: Approx. 133.1 x 99.8 x 78.8 mm / 5.2 x 3.9 x 3.1 in.
Weight: Approx. 580 g / 20.5 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),
Approx. 525 g / 18.5 oz. (Body only)
COPY
Specifications
344
• Operation Environment
Working temperature range
: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
Working humidity: 85% or less
• Battery Pack LP-E8
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated voltage: 7.2 V DC
Battery capacity: 1120 mAh
Working temperature range
: During charging: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°F
During shooting: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
Working humidity: 85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D)
: Approx. 37.1 x 15.4 x 55.2 mm / 1.5 x 0.6 x 2.2 in.
Weight: Approx. 52 g / 1.8 oz.
• Battery Charger LC-E8
Compatible battery: Battery Pack LP-E8
Recharging time: Approx. 2 hours (at 23°C/73°F)
Rated input: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Rated output: 8.4 V DC / 720 mA
Working temperature range
: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°F
Working humidity: 85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D)
: Approx. 69 x 28 x 87.5 mm / 2.7 x 1.1 x 3.4 in.
Weight: Approx. 82 g / 2.9 oz.
• Battery Charger LC-E8E
Compatible battery: Battery Pack LP-E8
Recharging time: Approx. 2 hours (at 23°C/73°F)
Rated input: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Rated output: 8.4 V DC / 720 mA
Working temperature range
: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°F
Working humidity: 85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D)
: Approx. 69 x 28 x 87.5 mm / 2.7 x 1.1 x 3.4 in.
Weight: Approx. 82 g / 2.9 oz. (excluding power cord)
• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
Angle of view: Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 27°50’
Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 23°20’
Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 15°40’
Lens construction: 13 elements in 11 groups
Minimum aperture: f/22 - 36
Closest focusing distance
: 0.25 m / 0.82 ft. (from image sensor plane)
COPY
345
Specifications
Max. magnification: 0.36x (at 55 mm)
Field of view: 199 x 129 - 63 x 42 mm / 7.83 x 5.08 - 2.48 x 1.65 in. (at
0.25 m / 0.82 ft.)
Image Stabilizer: Lens shift type
Filter size: 58 mm
Lens cap: E-58 II
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 69.0 x 75.2 mm / 2.72 x 2.96 in.
Weight: Approx. 205 g / 7.2 oz.
Hood: EW-63C (sold separately)
Case: LP1016 (sold separately)
• EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
Angle of view: Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 11°30’
Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 9°30’
Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 6°20’
Lens construction: 16 elements in 12 groups
Minimum aperture: f/22 - 36
Closest focusing distance
*: At 18 mm focal length: 0.39 m / 1.28 ft.
(Approx. 372 x 248 mm / 14.6 x 9.8 in. field of view)
At 135 mm focal length: 0.39 m / 1.28 ft.
(Approx. 80 x 53 mm / 3.1 x 2.1 in. field of view)
* Distance from image sensor plane
Max. magnification: 0.28x (at 135 mm)
Image Stabilizer: Lens shift type
Filter size: 67 mm
Lens cap: E-67 II
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 76.6 x 96.0 mm / 3.0 x 3.8 in.
Weight: Approx. 480 g / 16.9 oz.
Hood: EW-73B (sold separately)
Case: LP1116 (sold separately)
All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are based on
CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).
Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.
If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the
respective lens maker.
COPY
346
The kit lenses use a stepping motor that drives the focus lens. The
motor controls the focus lens even during zooming.
1. When the camera is OFF
The motor does not operate while the camera is OFF or when the
camera is OFF due to the auto power off function. Therefore, users
must be aware of the following points.
Manual focusing is not possible.
During zooming, inaccurate focusing may occur.
2. When the lens is in sleep mode
If not operated for a certain period of time, this lens will enter sleep
mode in order to save power, apart from the camera’s auto power off.
To exit sleep mode, press the shutter button halfway.
In sleep mode, the motor will not operate even if the camera is ON.
Therefore, users must be aware of the following points.
Manual focusing is not possible.
During zooming, inaccurate focusing may occur.
3. During initial reset
When the camera is turned ON or when the camera is turned ON by
pressing the shutter button halfway when the camera is OFF due to
the auto power off function*1, the lens performs an initial reset of the
focus lens.
Although the image in the viewfinder will appear out of focus
during the initial reset, this is not a malfunction.
Although the shutter can be released during the initial reset, users
must wait approx. 1 second*2 after the initial reset has completed
before shooting.
*1: Applicable to the following EF-S lens compatible digital SLR cameras:
EOS 7D, EOS 60D, EOS 60Da, EOS 50D, EOS 40D, EOS 30D, EOS 20D,
EOS 20Da, EOS REBEL T3i/600D, EOS REBEL T2i/550D, EOS REBEL T1i/
500D, EOS REBEL XSi/450D, EOS REBEL T3/1100D, EOS REBEL XS/
1000D, EOS DIGITAL REBEL XTi/400D DIGITAL, EOS DIGITAL REBEL XT/
350D DIGITAL, EOS DIGITAL REBEL/300D DIGITAL
*2: The initial reset time varies depending on the camera used.
Handling Precautions: EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM,
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
COPY
347
Trademarks
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
in the United States and other countries.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
All other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned in this
manual are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a
video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”
* Notice displayed in English as required.
COPY
348
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this
product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-
genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery
pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request
such repairs on a chargeable basis.
COPY
349
Safety Warnings
Follow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury, death,
and material damage.
Preventing Serious Injury or Death
• To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, and explosions, follow the
safeguards below:
- Do not use any batteries, power sources, and accessories not specified in this
booklet. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.
- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery pack or back-up battery. Do
not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back-up battery. Do not expose
the battery pack or back-up battery to fire or water. And do not subject the battery
pack or back-up battery to strong physical shock.
- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed polarity (+ –). Do not
mix new and old or different types of batteries.
- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range
of 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharging time.
- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,
accessories, connecting cables, etc.
• Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a child swallows the battery, consult a
physician immediately. (Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and intestines.)
• When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate the electrical contacts
with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent
fire or an explosion.
• If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging,
immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop the recharging
and prevent a fire.
• If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or
fumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process.
• Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or
clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a
physician immediately.
• During the recharging, keep the equipment away from the reach of children. The cord
can accidentally choke the child or give an electrical shock.
• Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not fire the flash at someone driving a car. It may cause an accident.
• Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When
using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter away.
• Before storing the camera or accessory when not in use, remove the battery pack and
disconnect the power plug. This is to prevent electrical shock, heat generation, and
fire.
• Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an
explosion or fire.
COPY
350
• If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do
not touch the internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock.
• Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause
electrical shock.
• Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens.
Doing so may damage your vision.
• Keep the camera from the reach of small children. The neck strap can accidentally
choke the child.
• Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places. This is to prevent fire and
electrical shock.
• Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.
• To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
- Always insert the power plug all the way in.
- Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.
- When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.
- Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord.
Also do not twist or tie the cords.
- Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.
- Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged.
• Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around
the power outlet. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power outlet
may become moist and short-circuit the outlet to cause a fire.
Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage
• Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source. The
equipment may become hot and cause skin burns.
• Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause
injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.
• Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.
• Do not cover or wrap the battery-recharging apparatus with a cloth. Doing so may trap
heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire.
• If you drop the camera in water or if water or metal fragments enter inside the camera,
promptly remove the battery pack and back-up battery. This is to prevent fire and
electrical shock.
• Do not use or leave the battery pack or back-up battery in a hot environment. Doing so
may cause battery leakage or a shorter battery life. The battery pack or back-up
battery can also become hot and cause skin burns.
• Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the equipment.
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.
If the product does not work properly or requires repair, contact
your dealer or your nearest Canon Service Center.
COPY
351
Digital Camera Model DS126431 Systems
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
—
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be used
with this equipment in order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part
15 of the FCC rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise
specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you
could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A. Inc.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
Tel No. (516)328-5600
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
When connecting to and using a household power outlet, use only AC
Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (rated input: 100-240 V AC 50/60 Hz, rated output:
7.4 V DC). Using anything else can cause fire, overheating, or
electrical shock.
COPY
352
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS — This manual contains important safety
and operating instructions for Battery Charger LC-E8 & LC-E8E.
2. Before using the charger, read all instructions and cautionary remarks on
(1) the charger, (2) the battery pack, and (3) the product using the battery
pack.
3. CAUTION — To reduce risk of injury, charge only the Battery Pack LP-E8.
Other types of batteries may burst, causing personal injury and other
damage.
4. Do not expose the charger to rain or snow.
5. Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by Canon may result in
fire, electric shock, or personal injury.
6. To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord, pull by plug rather than
by cord when disconnecting charger.
7. Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or
otherwise subjected to damage or stress.
8. Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug - replace them
immediately.
9. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped,
or otherwise damaged in any way; take it to a qualified serviceman.
10. Do not disassemble the charger; take it to a qualified serviceman when
service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of
electric shock or fire.
11. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug charger from outlet before
attempting any maintenance or cleaning.
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION
Unless otherwise stated in this manual, there are no user serviceable parts
inside. Refer servicing to qualified serviceman.
USA and Canada only:
The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is
recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on
how to recycle this battery.
For CA, USA only
Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
COPY
353
MEMO
COPY
354
MEMO
COPY
355
MEMO
COPY
356
MEMO
COPY
357
MEMO
COPY
358
MEMO
COPY
359
MEMO
COPY
360
MEMO
COPY
361
Downloading Images to a
Personal Computer
This chapter explains how to download images from the
camera to your personal computer, gives an overview of
the software in the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (CD-
ROM) provided with the camera, and explains how to
install the software on your personal computer. It also
explains how to view the PDF files on the Software
Instruction Manual CD-ROM.
EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk
(Software)
Software Instruction Manual
COPY
362
You can use the provided software to download the images in the
camera to your personal computer. There are two ways to do this.
1Install the software (p.366).
2Use the provided interface cable
to connect the camera to your
personal computer.
Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
Connect the cable to the camera’s
<C> terminal with the cable
plug’s <D> icon facing the front of
the camera.
Connect the cord’s plug to the
personal computer’s USB terminal.
3Use EOS Utility to download the
images/movies.
For details, refer to the Software
Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM
(p.367).
Downloading Images to a Personal Computer
Download by Connecting the Camera to the Personal Computer
COPY
363
Downloading Images to a Personal Computer
If you have a commercially-available card reader, you can use it to
download images to your personal computer.
1Install the software (p.366).
2Insert the card into the card
reader.
3Use Canon software to download
the images/movies.
XUse Digital Photo Professional.
XUse ImageBrowser EX.
For details, refer to the Software
Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM
(p.367).
.
Downloading Images with a Card Reader
When downloading images from the camera to your personal computer, if
you do not use Canon software and instead use a card reader, copy the
DCIM folder on the card to your personal computer.
COPY
364
EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk
This disk contains various software for EOS DIGITAL
cameras.
With the camera connected to a personal computer, EOS Utility enables
you to transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the
computer. You can also use this software to set various camera settings
and shoot remotely with the computer connected to the camera. Also,
you can copy background music tracks, such as EOS Sample Music*,
to the card.
* Can be used as background music during playback of video snapshot albums,
movies, or slide shows on the camera.
This software is recommended for users who mainly shoot
1
images.
You can view, edit, process, and print
1
images at high speed. You
can also edit JPEG images while retaining the original images.
This software is recommended for users who mainly shoot JPEG images.
You can easily view and play still photos, movies, and video snapshot
albums and also print JPEG images. Add-on features such as EOS Video
Snapshot Task (p.195) can also be downloaded from the Internet.
About the Software
EOS Utility
Digital Photo Professional
ImageBrowser EX
Note that the software ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser provided with
previous cameras does not support still photos and MOV movie files shot
with this camera (it is not compatible). Use ImageBrowser EX provided with
this camera.
COPY
365
About the Software
You can edit Picture Styles and create and save original Picture Style
files. This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in
processing images.
Picture Style Editor
COPY
366
1
Insert EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (CD-ROM).
For Macintosh, double-click to open the CD-ROM icon displayed
on the desktop, then double-click on [Canon EOS Digital
Installer].
When a screen to select where you live or language appears,
follow the on-screen instructions.
2Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen
instructions to install.
For Macintosh, click [Install].
If install screen for “Microsoft Silverlight” is displayed during
installation, install “Microsoft Silverlight”.
3Click [Restart] and remove the CD-ROM after the
computer restarts.
When the computer has restarted, the installation is complete.
Installing the Software
Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install the
software. The software will not be installed correctly.
Even if your personal computer already has ImageBrowser EX installed,
install ImageBrowser EX included on the CD-ROM that came with your
new camera. It is the latest version with features optimized for your
camera. You can also use the auto update feature to add the latest
functions.
Even if a previous version of the software is installed or if you have
different software, install the software by following the steps below. (The
newer version will overwrite the previous version.)
COPY
367
Contains the Software Instruction Manuals.
1Insert the [Software INSTRUCTION MANUAL] CD-ROM
into your computer.
2Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
For Windows, the icon is displayed in [(My) Computer].
For Macintosh, the icon is displayed on the desktop.
3Copy the [English] folder to your computer.
Instruction Manual PDFs with the names below are copied.
4Double-click the copied PDF file.
Adobe Reader (most recent version recommended) must be
installed on your computer.
Adobe Reader can be downloaded free from the Internet.
Software Instruction Manual
Copying and Viewing the Instruction Manual PDFs
Windows Macintosh
EOS Utility EUx.xW_E_xx EUx.xM_E_xx
Digital Photo Professional DPPx.xW_E_xx DPPx.xM_E_xx
ImageBrowser EX IBXx.x_E_xx
Picture Style Editor PSEx.xW_E_xx PSEx.xM_E_xx
COPY
368
MEMO
COPY
369
Quick Reference Guide
and Index
Menu Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.370
Image-recording Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.371
A Picture Style- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.371
Q Quick Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.372
Nomenclature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.373
Basic Zone Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.375
D Using the Built-in Flash - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.375
Creative Zone Modes- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376
d: Program AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376
s: Shutter-priority AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376
f: Aperture-priority AE- - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376
f: AF Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.377
S AF Point - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.377
i: ISO Speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.378
i Drive Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.378
A Live View Shooting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.379
k Shooting Movies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.380
Image Playback - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.381
COPY
370
Quick Reference Guide
<M>
button
LCD
monitor/
Touch
screen
<S>
Cross keys
<0> button
1. Press the <M> button to display the menu.
2. Press the <U> key to select a tab, then press the <V>
key to select the desired item.
3. Press <0> to display the setting.
4. After setting the item, press <0>.
Menu Operations
Tabs
Menu settingsMenu items
Creative Zone
Modes
Basic Zone Modes Movie Shooting
COPY
371
Quick Reference Guide
Select [z1: Image quality], then press <0>.
Press the <U> key to select the quality, then press <0>.
For <S> (Neutral) and <U> (Faithful), see page 96.
Image-Recording Quality
Image-recording quality
Recorded pixels
Possible shots
Press the <XA> button.
Press the <U> key to select the
Picture Style, then press <0>.
A Picture StyleN
Style
D
Auto
P
Standard
Q
Portrait
R
Landscape
V
Monochrome
Description
Color tones optimized for the particular scene.
Vivid colors and sharp images.
Nice skin tones and slightly sharp images.
Vivid blue skies and greenery and very sharp images.
Black-and-white images.
COPY
Quick Reference Guide
372
Q Quick Control
Press the <Q> button.
The Quick Control screen will
appear.
In Basic Zone modes, the settable functions differ depending
on the shooting mode.
Press the <S> key to select a function, then turn the <6>
dial to set it.
Basic Zone Modes Creative Zone Modes
Shutter speed Aperture
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
Picture Style
Exposure
compensation/
AEB setting
Shooting mode
Flash exposure
compensation
Built-in flash settings
White
balance
Drive mode
Return
White balance correction
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
AF operation
Metering mode
White balance bracketing
Image-recording
quality
COPY
373
Quick Reference Guide
Access lamp
<O> Aperture/Exposure
compensation button
<A> Live View shooting/
Movie shooting button
<S> AF point
selection button
<A> AE lock button
<0> Setting button
<S>
Cross keys
<Q> Quick Control button
Nomenclature
Focus mode switch
Shutter
button
Mode DialPower switch
<i> ISO speed
setting button
<D> Flash
button
<6>
Main Dial
COPY
Quick Reference Guide
374
Shutter speed
ISO speed
Aperture
Shooting mode
Possible shots
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Built-in flash
settings
Metering mode
White balance
Image-recording
quality
Exposure level
indicator
Drive mode
Battery check
zxcn
OK Not good
Monochrome shooting
Flash exposure
compensation
Shutter speed
Viewfinder Information
Shooting Settings
ISO speed
AF points
AF point activation indicator <•>
Spot metering
circle
Focus
confirmation light
Aperture
Max. burst
AE lock
Flash-ready
Exposure level indicator
Picture Style
AF operation
Quick Control icon
COPY
375
Quick Reference Guide
A
Scene Intelligent Auto
7
Flash Off
C
Creative Auto
2
Portrait
3
Landscape
4
Close-up
5
Sports
8 Special scene
6
Night Portrait
F
Handheld Night Scene
G
HDR Backlight Control
All the settings necessary for
shooting are set automatically.
You just press the shutter button,
and the camera does the rest.
Basic Zone Modes
B
a
s
i
c
Z
o
n
e
At the 8 position, press the <Q> button, select the shooting
mode icon with <S> key, and turn the <6> dial to set the
shooting mode.
Basic Zone Modes
If necessary, the built-in flash will be raised and fire automatically
in low-light or backlit conditions (except in the <7> <3> <5>
<F> <G> modes).
D Using the Built-in Flash
Creative Zone Modes
Press the <D> button to raise the
built-in flash, then shoot.
COPY
Quick Reference Guide
376
Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
You can change the camera
settings as desired to shoot in
various ways.
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and
aperture in the same way as the <A> mode.
Creative Zone Modes
d: Program AE
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
Turn the
<
6
>
dial to set the desired
shutter speed, then focus the subject.
The aperture will be set automatically.
If the aperture display blinks, turn the
<
6
> dial until it stops blinking.
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
Turn the
<
6
>
dial to set the desired
aperture, then focus the subject.
The shutter speed will be set
automatically.
If the shutter speed display blinks, turn
the <
6
>
dial until it stops blinking.
s: Shutter-priority AE
f: Aperture-priority AE
C
r
e
a
t
i
v
e
Z
o
n
e
COPY
377
Quick Reference Guide
Press the <S> button.
Press the <S> key to select the
AF point.
While looking through the
viewfinder, you can select the AF
point by turning the <6> dial
until the desired AF point flashes
in red.
Pressing <0> toggles the AF
point selection between the
center AF point and automatic
AF point selection.
S AF PointN
Set the lens focus mode switch
to <f>.
Press the <Zf> button.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the AF
operation, then press <0>.
X(One-Shot AF):
For still subjects
9(AI Focus AF):
Switches the AF operation
automatically
Z(AI Servo AF):
For moving subjects
f: AF OperationN
COPY
Quick Reference Guide
378
Press the <i> button.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the ISO
speed, then press <0>.
When [AUTO] is selected, the
ISO speed is set automatically.
When you press the shutter
button halfway, the ISO speed
setting is displayed.
i: ISO SpeedN
Press the <YiQ> button.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the drive
mode, then press <0>.
u : Single shooting
i : Continuous shooting
Q : Self-timer:10 sec./Remote
control
l : Self-timer:2 sec.
q : Self-timer:Continuous
i Drive Mode
COPY
379
Quick Reference Guide
Temperature No Flash 50% Flash Use
At 23°C / 73°F Approx. 200 shots Approx. 180 shots
Press the <A> button to display
the Live View image.
A Live View Shooting
Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
Press the shutter button
completely to take the picture.
Battery Life with Live View Shooting
Temperature No Flash 50% Flash Use
At 23°C / 73°F Approx. 200 shots Approx. 180 shots
A Live View Shooting
COPY
Quick Reference Guide
380
Set the power switch to <k>.
Set the Mode Dial to any
shooting mode except <a>.
Press the <A> button to start
shooting a movie.
To stop movie shooting, press
the <A> button again.
Recording movie
Microphone
k Shooting Movies
COPY
381
Quick Reference Guide
yuyu
Image Playback
MagnifyIndex
Erase
Playback
x
L
Select image
B
Shooting information
S
COPY
382
Index
Numerics
10-sec. or 2-sec. delay .................106
1280x720 ......................................185
1920x1080 ....................................185
4- or 9-image index display...........242
640x480 ........................................185
9-point AF auto selection ..............100
A
A (Scene Intelligent Auto)........... 58
AC Adapter Kit ............................. 306
Access lamp .................................. 32
Accessories .....................................3
Adobe RGB.................................. 141
AE lock .........................................123
AEB.......................................121, 298
AF → Focusing
AF point ....................................... 100
AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)............... 99
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ............... 98
AI Servo AF ............................. 61, 98
Ambience-based shots .................. 77
Aperture-priority AE ..................... 112
Art bold effect....................... 154, 276
Aspect ratio ..................................157
Audio/video OUT ..................252, 265
Auto Lighting Optimizer ...............125
Auto playback ..............................258
Auto power off........................ 34, 205
Auto reset .................................... 209
Auto rotate of vertical images ...... 212
Autofocus............................... 97, 100
Automatic selection of AF point ....100
Av (Aperture-priority AE).............. 112
A/V OUT .............................. 252, 265
B
B/W (Monochrome) ............... 96, 134
Background music........................ 261
Basic Zone modes ........................ 24
Battery ............................... 28, 30, 35
Battery check ................................ 35
Battery Grip ........................... 35, 316
Beeper......................................... 204
Black-and-white image.... 77, 96, 134
Bracketing ........................... 121, 140
Brightness (exposure) ..................119
Auto exposure bracketing
(AEB) .............................. 121, 298
Autoexposure lock (AE lock)... 123
Exposure compensation ..........119
Measurement method
(Metering mode) .......................117
Built-in flash.................................. 107
BULB (Bulb exposure) ................. 116
Bulb exposures .............................116
C
C (Creative Auto)........................ 64
Cable....... 3, 262, 265, 280, 316, 362
Camera
Camera shake ........................ 142
Clear camera settings............. 214
Holding the camera................... 42
Settings display....................... 213
Camera shake......................... 41, 42
Card .................................. 17, 31, 48
Card reminder......................... 204
Format ...................................... 48
Low-level format ....................... 49
Problem .............................. 32, 49
SD speed class....................... 173
Write-protect .............................. 31
Center-weighted average
metering .......................................118
Charger ................................... 26, 28
Chromatic aberration correction.. 130
COPY
383
Index
Cleaning (Image sensor) ......223, 226
Clear camera settings .................. 214
Close-ups....................................... 69
Color space (color reproduction
range)........................................... 141
Color temperature ........................ 137
Color tone .................................... 133
Continuous................................... 208
Continuous shooting .................... 104
Contrast ....................................... 133
Copyright information ...................210
Creative Auto ................................. 64
Creative filters ...................... 152, 274
M icon..............................................4
Creative Zone modes..................... 24
Cropping (printing) ........................287
Custom Functions ........................ 296
Custom WB.................................. 137
D
Date/Time ...................................... 36
Daylight saving time....................... 37
DC coupler ................................... 306
Depth-of-field preview .................. 114
Dial .........................................20, 109
Digital terminal ..................... 280, 362
Dioptric adjustment ........................ 42
Direct printing............................... 292
DPOF ........................................... 289
Dragging ........................................ 54
Drive mode............... 22, 66, 104, 106
Dust Delete Data.......................... 224
E
Erase (image) .............................. 268
Error codes .................................. 337
Evaluative metering ..................... 117
Exposure compensation .............. 119
Exposure level increments........... 298
Extension ......................................209
External Speedlite ....................... 309
Eyecup ........................................ 308
Eye-Fi card .................................. 311
Eyepiece cover...................... 27, 308
F
Faithful............................................ 96
FE lock ........................................ 124
Feature guide ................................ 52
FEB ............................................. 220
File name..................................... 208
File size ......................... 89, 186, 270
Filter effect........................... 134, 274
Final image simulation.......... 150, 181
Fine (Image-recording quality) ....... 22
Firmware Ver. .............................. 321
First-curtain synchronization ....... 221
Fish-eye effect..................... 154, 276
Flash
Built-in flash ............................ 107
Custom Functions ................... 222
Effective range ........................ 107
External Speedlite ................... 309
FE lock .................................... 124
Flash control ........................... 218
Flash exposure
compensation........................... 120
Flash off ........................ 63, 66, 76
Flash-sync speed.................... 310
Manual flash.................... 221, 239
Red-eye reduction................... 108
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain) ...................... 221
Wireless .................................. 229
Flash exposure compensation .... 120
Flash mode.......................... 220, 221
Flash-sync contacts....................... 20
Focus confirmation light ................ 58
Focus lock ..................................... 61
Focus mode switch......... 39, 103, 170
COPY
384
Index
Focusing
AF method .......................159, 196
AF operation.............................. 97
AF point selection.................... 100
AF-assist beam ............... 101, 300
Beeper .....................................204
Difficult-to-focus
subjects ...................103, 165, 202
Manual focusing ..............103, 170
Out of focus ..........41, 42, 103, 165
Recompose ...............................61
Folder Create/Select.................... 206
Format (card initialization) ............. 48
Frame rate ...................................185
Full Auto
(Scene Intelligent Auto) ................. 58
Full High-Definition
(Full HD) ..............................185, 252
G
Grainy B/W .......................... 154, 275
Grid display.......................... 156, 198
H
Handheld Night Scene ...................73
HDMI.................................... 252, 262
HDMI CEC ...................................263
HDR Backlight Control................... 74
High ISO speed noise reduction .. 126
High-Definition (HD) .............185, 252
Highlight alert............................... 272
Highlight detail loss...................... 272
Highlight tone priority ...................299
Histogram (Brightness/RGB) .......272
Hot shoe ......................................309
Household power......................... 306
I
ICC profile.................................... 141
Image
Auto playback ......................... 258
Auto rotate .............................. 212
Erase ...................................... 268
Highlight alert.......................... 272
Histogram ............................... 272
Image characteristics
(Picture Style) .......... 95, 132, 135
Index ....................................... 242
Jump display
(Image browsing) .................... 243
Magnified view ........................ 244
Manual rotate .......................... 247
No. .......................................... 208
Playback ........................... 84, 241
Protect .................................... 266
Rating ..................................... 248
Review time ............................ 204
Shooting information............... 270
Slide show .............................. 258
Transfer.................................... 311
View on TV ..................... 252, 262
Image conversion factor................. 40
Image dust prevention. 223, 224, 226
Image review ............................... 204
Image Stabilizer (lens)................... 41
Image Zone ................................... 24
Image-recording quality................. 88
Index display ............................... 242
ISO speed ..................................... 92
Automatic setting (Auto) ........... 93
ISO expansion ........................ 298
Maximum ISO speed with
ISO Auto .................................... 94
J
JPEG............................................. 89
Jump display ............................... 243
L
Landscape............................... 68, 96
Language selection ....................... 38
Large (Image-recording quality) ..... 22
COPY
385
Index
LCD monitor................................... 17
Brightness adjustment ............. 205
Image playback ................. 84, 241
Menu screen...................... 46, 318
Screen color ............................ 217
Shooting settings display..... 22, 50
Vari-Angle ............................ 33, 62
Lens ......................................... 25, 39
Chromatic aberration
correction................................. 130
Image stabilizer ......................... 41
Lock release .............................. 40
Peripheral illumination
correction................................. 129
Light/scene-based shots ................81
Live View shooting .................62, 145
Aspect ratio ..............................157
Continuous AF .........................156
Creative filters ..........................152
Face+Tracking......................... 159
FlexiZone - Multi ...................... 161
FlexiZone - Single.................... 162
Grid display ..............................156
Information display .................. 148
Manual focusing .............. 103, 170
Metering timer.......................... 158
Possible shots ......................... 147
Quick Control ...........................151
Quick mode ............................. 166
Long exposure noise reduction.... 127
Long exposures ...........................116
M
M (Manual exposure) ................... 115
Macro photography ........................ 69
Magnified view ..................... 170, 244
Malfunction ...................................324
Manual exposure ................. 115, 177
Manual focus (MF) ............... 103, 170
Manual reset ................................ 209
Manual selection (AF).................. 100
Maximum burst........................ 89, 90
Medium (Image-recording
quality).................................... 22, 278
Memory card → Card
Menu ............................................. 46
My Menu ................................. 303
Setting procedure...................... 47
Settings ................................... 318
3 icon........................................ 4
Metering mode ............................ 117
Metering timer ..................... 158, 198
MF (Manual focusing).......... 103, 170
Microphone................................... 174
Miniature effect.................... 155, 276
Mirror lockup........................ 142, 300
Mode Dial ...................................... 24
Monochrome ................... 77, 96, 134
Movie........................................... 173
AF method ...................... 184, 196
Attenuator ............................... 199
Autoexposure.......................... 174
Edit.......................................... 256
Editing out first and
last scenes .............................. 256
Enjoying .................................. 252
File size................................... 186
Frame rate .............................. 185
Grid display ............................. 198
Information display.................. 179
Manual exposure .................... 177
Manual focusing...................... 174
Metering timer ......................... 198
Movie recording size ............... 185
Movie Servo AF ...................... 196
Playback ................................. 254
Quick Control .......................... 184
Recording time........................ 186
Sound recording............... 187, 198
Still photo shooting.................. 182
Video snapshot ....................... 187
Video snapshot album ............ 187
View on TV...................... 252, 262
Wind filter ................................ 199
COPY
386
Index
Multi Shot Noise Reduction ..........126
My Menu ...................................... 303
N
Neutral ...........................................96
Night Portrait.................................. 72
Night scene ..............................72, 73
Noise reduction
High ISO speed ....................... 126
Long exposures .......................127
Nomenclature ................................ 20
Non-Canon flash units ................. 310
Normal (Image-recording quality) ...22
NTSC ................................... 185, 320
O
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF) ............98
One-Shot AF ..................................98
P
P (Program AE) ............................. 86
PAL ...................................... 185, 320
Paper settings (printing)............... 282
Partial metering............................ 117
Peripheral illumination
correction ..................................... 129
Personal white balance................ 138
Photobook Set-up ........................293
PictBridge .................................... 279
Picture Style ...................95, 132, 135
Pixels ............................................. 88
Playback ................................ 84, 241
Portrait ..................................... 67, 95
Possible shots.................. 35, 88, 147
Power
Auto power off ......................... 205
Battery check..............................35
Household power .................... 306
Possible shots .............35, 88, 147
Recharge................................... 28
Predictive (AI Servo)...................... 98
Pressing completely ...................... 43
Pressing halfway ........................... 43
Printing ........................................ 279
Cropping .................................. 287
Layout ..................................... 283
Paper settings......................... 282
Photobook Set-up .................... 293
Print Order (DPOF)................. 289
Printing effects ........................ 284
Tilt correction .......................... 287
Program AE................................... 86
Program shift ................................. 87
Protect
(image erase-protection) ............. 266
Q
Q (Quick
Control) ........... 44, 76, 151, 184, 250
Quick Control ................................ 76
Quick mode ................................. 166
R
Rating mark ................................. 248
RAW ......................................... 22, 91
RAW+JPEG ............................. 22, 91
Recharge....................................... 28
Red-eye reduction....................... 108
Release shutter without card....... 204
Remote control shooting ............. 307
Remote switch ............................. 308
Resize ......................................... 277
Revert to default settings ............ 214
Rotate (image) ............ 212, 247, 287
S
Safety warnings........................... 349
Saturation .................................... 133
Scene icon ........................... 149, 176
SD, SDHC, SDXC card → Card
Second-curtain synchronization .. 221
Self-timer ..................................... 106
Sensor cleaning .................. 223, 226
COPY
387
Index
Sepia (Monochrome) ............. 77, 134
Sharpness ....................................133
Shooting information display........ 270
Shooting mode............................... 24
Av (Aperture-priority AE) ......... 112
M (Manual exposure)............... 115
P (Program AE) ......................... 86
Tv (Shutter-priority AE)............ 110
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...... 58
7 (Flash Off)............................ 63
C (Creative Auto) .................... 64
2 (Portrait) ............................... 67
3 (Landscape) ........................ 68
4 (Close-up)............................. 69
5(Sports)................................. 70
SCN (Special scene) ................. 71
6 (Night Portrait).................. 72
F (Handheld Night Scene) ...73
G (HDR Backlight Control) .. 74
Shooting mode’s settable
functions....................................... 314
Shooting settings display ......... 22, 50
Shutter button ................................43
Shutter synchronization ............... 221
Shutter-priority AE........................ 110
Single shooting ...................... 66, 315
Single-image display ......................84
Single-point AF ............................100
Slide show.................................... 258
Small (Image-recording
quality) ....................................22, 278
Soft focus............................. 154, 275
Software................................... 3, 364
Speaker........................................ 254
Special scene mode....................... 71
Sports............................................. 70
Spot metering............................... 117
sRGB ........................................... 141
Stopped-down aperture ............... 114
Strap .............................................. 27
System map .................................316
T
Tap (Touch).................................... 53
Temperature warning........... 171, 200
Time zone...................................... 36
Tone priority................................. 299
Toning effect (Monochrome)........ 134
Touch beeping ............................... 54
Touch screen ........... 21, 53, 245, 255
Touch shutter............................... 168
Toy camera effect ................ 155, 276
Tripod socket................................. 21
Tv (Shutter-priority AE)................ 110
U
USB (Digital) terminal.......... 280, 362
V
Vari-Angle LCD monitor ........... 33, 62
Video snapshot............................ 187
Video snapshot album................. 187
Video system ............... 185, 265, 320
View on TV .......................... 252, 262
Viewfinder...................................... 23
Dioptric adjustment ................... 42
Volume (Movie playback) ............ 255
W
Water painting effect ............ 154, 276
WB (White balance) .................... 137
White balance.............................. 137
Bracketing ............................... 140
Correction ............................... 139
Custom.................................... 137
Personal .................................. 138
Wind filter .................................... 199
Wireless flash shooting ............... 229
Custom wireless shooting ....... 234
Easy wireless shooting ........... 231
COPY
CPH-E063-000 © CANON INC. 2013
The lenses and accessories mentioned in this Instruction Manual are current as of
January 2013. For information on the camera’s compatibility with any lenses and
accessories introduced after this date, contact any Canon Service Center.
CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
U.S.A. CANON U.S.A. INC.
http://www.usa.canon.com/eos
http://www.usa.canon.com/support
For all inquires concerning this product, call toll free in the U.S.
1-800-OK-CANON
CANADA CANON CANADA INC. HEADQUARTERS
6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. MONTREAL BRANCH
5990, Côte-de-Liesse, Montréal Québec H4T 1V7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. CALGARY OFFICE
2828, 16th Street, N.E. Calgary, Alberta T2E 7K7, Canada
For all inquiries concerning this product, call toll free in Canada
1-800-OK-CANON
EUROPE, CANON EUROPA N.V.
AFRICA & Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
MIDDLE EAST CANON FRANCE S.A.S.
17, Quai du Président Paul Doumer, 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON UK LTD.
Woodhatch Reigate, Surrey RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano 8, 20097 San Donato Milanese, (MI), Italy
CANON Schweiz A.G.
Industriestrasse 12, 8305 Dietlikon, Switzerland
Canon GmbH
Zetschegasse 11, A-1230 Vienna, Austria
CANON España,S.A.
Av. De Europa, 6 Alcobendas 28108 Madrid, Spain
CANON Portugal S.A.
Rua Alfredo da Silva,14 Alfragide 2610-016 Amadora, Portugal
CENTRAL & CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
SOUTH AMERICA http://www.cla.canon.com
ASIA CANON (China) Co., LTD.
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 Harbour Front Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON KOREA CONSUMER IMAGING INC.
Canon BS Tower 5F, #168-12 Samseong-dong, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, Korea
OCEANIA CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON NEW ZEALAND LTD.
Akoranga Business Park, Akoranga Drive, Northcote, Auckland, New Zealand
JAPAN CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.
16-6, Kohnan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan
COPY